JP7194432B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

There is a gaming machine that gives a notice in a predetermined notice mode that the game will be a hit or that the game will be in a ready-to-win state before the determination result is displayed.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-119695

When the result is notified in advance by the advance notice, the game performance after the advance notice may cause a decrease in interest.
An object of the present invention in one aspect is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the decline in interest in game presentation after advance notification.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine is provided as described below. The game machine includes a notice effect means capable of executing a notice effect for predicting the result of the game, and a ready-to- win effect means capable of executing a ready-to- win effect for directing the derivation process of the game result after the execution of the notice effect. The notice effect means includes a first fixed notice effect that gives a fixed notice in a first mode that the result of the game is a special result, and a second fixed notice effect that overlaps with the first fixed notice effect and is different from the first mode. It is possible to execute a second fixed notice effect for giving a fixed notice that the result of the game is a special result, and a non-fixed notice effect for giving a notice that the result of the game is a special result with a predetermined degree of reliability. The ready-to- reach effect means is capable of executing a first ready-to- reach effect that directs the derivation process in a first period and a second ready-to-reach effect that directs the derivation process in a second period different from the first period, When a notice performance means executes a non-fixed notice performance, the ratio of selecting the second ready -to-win performance is made larger than the ratio of selecting the first ready -to-win performance.

According to one aspect, in the gaming machine, it is possible to reduce the decrease in interest in the game performance after the advance notification.

It is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment. It is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment. 1 is a block diagram showing an example of a control system for a gaming machine according to the first embodiment; FIG. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of the production|presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the batch display apparatus of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of main processing of the first embodiment; FIG. 8 is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of main processing of the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 3) showing a flowchart of main processing of the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 4) illustrating a flowchart of main processing of the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 5) illustrating a flowchart of main processing according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main process in the production|presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the decorative design of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop display using the decorative pattern of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the rocking|fluctuation of the background part of the decorative pattern A during the temporary stop display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop mode of the decorative design A of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows highlighting display and ambiguous (non-highlighting) display of the outline of the pattern of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing of the emphasis display of the outline of the pattern of 1st Embodiment, and an ambiguous (non-emphasis) display. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing of the emphasis display of the outline of the pattern of the modification of 1st Embodiment, and an ambiguous (non-emphasis) display. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop display using the decoration pattern of the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the message display production|presentation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the outline display of the small pattern group of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop mode of the decorative design of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop mode of the decorative design of the modification of 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a contour display switching target portion during temporary stop display of decorative symbols according to the second embodiment; It is a front view showing an example of the game board of the third embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of the control system of the gaming machine of the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game performance of the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state transition of the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a game sequence of the gaming machine of the third embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a game sequence of the gaming machine of the third embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the variation display pattern selection table of the special figure 2 game of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the overview of the display apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the overview of the pattern display area of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the design displayed on a design display area in the special figure game of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of an overview of a reservation display field of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the generation|occurrence|production animation of a hold|hold display of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram (Part 1) showing an example of the missing symbol effect of the third embodiment; It is a figure (2) which shows an example of the symbol loss production|presentation of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of a missing symbol effect in the third embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol loss production|presentation of the modification of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a loss effect when a pending display occurs according to the third embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (Part 2) showing an example of a loss effect when a pending display occurs according to the third embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the pending|holding display part of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the highlighting display of the outline of the pattern during loss|loss effect|action of the modification of 3rd Embodiment, and ambiguous (non-highlighting) display. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop display using the decoration design during loss production|presentation of the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop mode of the decorative design during loss production|presentation of the modification of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to variable display command A of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to variable display command B of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to variable display command C of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 14 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 14 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 14 is a diagram (part 4) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 17 is a diagram (No. 5) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a foretelling effect pattern selection table and foretelling effect pattern reliability according to the fourth embodiment; It is a diagram showing an example of the specific effect pattern selection probability of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific pattern selection rate (hit) according to the notice effect|effect of 4th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of specific pattern selection ratios (wins) for each advance notice effect in the modification of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of specific pattern selection ratios (wins) for different advance notice effects in the modification of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to a variable display command B1 of a modified example of the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to a variable display command B2 of a modified example of the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of the appearance timing of a fixed advance notice effect in a modified example of the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen during the game of the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen during the game of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the double structure of the pending|holding icon of 5th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the display mode of the inner core icon and the degree of expectation according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode that provides unclear guidance on the degree of expectation of the inner core icon according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the display mode of the outer shell icon and the possibility of change according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (Part 1) showing an example of a change pattern of a pending icon according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a change pattern of a pending icon according to the fifth embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the double structure of the pending|holding icon of the modification of 5th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a hold standby display, a hold digestion display, and an inner core icon row in a modification of the fifth embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the pending|holding change in the pending|holding digestion icon of the modification of 5th Embodiment, and a pending|holding icon. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a pending icon after a pending icon roulette effect in a modified example of the fifth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a holding pedestal display of a modified example of the fifth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a holding pedestal display of a modified example of the fifth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of a holding pedestal display of a modified example of the fifth embodiment;

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]
First, a first embodiment will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of a gaming machine according to the first embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is an outer frame (support frame)
11 is assembled so as to be openable and rotatable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12 . A glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (body frame) 12 .

In addition, on the left and right of the glass frame 15, lamps, LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes), etc. are built in to decorate and produce, and to notify when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) in a notification color (eg, red) and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (eg, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided on the lower portion of the front frame 12. As shown in FIG. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the content of the abnormality is notified by voice from the speakers 19a and 19b. It should be noted that a lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15 for announcing abnormal dispensing.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper tray (storage tray) 21 for supplying game balls to a batted ball shooting device (not shown), and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 are stored. An upper tray ball outlet 22 for flowing out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls dispensed when the upper tray 21 is full, and an operation section 24 for a ball shooting device are provided.

Furthermore, on the upper edge of the upper plate 21, a production button 25 used for intervening operations for game production, etc.
is provided. The production button 25 functions as a production operation reception unit that accepts an intervention operation to the game production, and also as a production unit that can produce in a desired manner (for example, a light emission mode, a vibration mode, a projection mode, etc.). Function. An option setting section 29 is provided at the left edge of the upper tray 21 for the player to set various options. The option setting unit 29 includes a cross cursor switch capable of accepting input operations in four directions, a central switch located in the center of the cross cursor switch capable of accepting decision operations and the like, and a switch located at the periphery of the cross cursor switch capable of operating volume and the like. There are two accessory switches used for Furthermore, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12 .

Note that the game machine 10 operates (for example, presses down) the effect button 25 (push button).
Based on the player's operation received from the effect button switch 25a (see FIG. 4) that detects , it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened. For example, an effect in which a player's operation is intervened is an effect in a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2). The character displayed on 41 can be operated, or the identification information in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game displayed on the display device 41 can be stopped. It should be noted that such intervention by the player includes not only the effect button 25 but also switches of the option setting section 29 (cross cursor switch,
A central switch, an accessory switch) may be used. In FIG. 4, which will be described later, the switches of the option setting section 29 are grouped together into a setting switch 29a.
It represents.

Also, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 operated by the player when receiving a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button 27 operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A button 28, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation portion 24, the ball shooting device shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 into the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. (see Figure 2). When the player operates one or more of the above-described setting switches 29a (cross cursor switch, center switch, accessory switch) of the option setting unit 29, for example, the signals emitted from the speakers 19a and 19b are emitted. It is possible to set the volume to be played and the brightness of the game board 30 .

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment.
A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30 . The game area 32 includes resin side cases 3 provided at the four corners of the game board 30.
3 and a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 having a display device (variable display device) 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40 . That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41 and protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41 to prevent game balls from jumping into the surrounding game area 32 .

The display device 41 is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), information related to the game such as multiple identification information (special symbols), characters that direct the special symbol fluctuation display game, and background images that enhance the performance effect are displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. In addition, on the display screen, images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image,
fanfare display image, ending display image, etc.) are displayed.

Further, a board effect device 44 is provided on the upper part of the center case 40 for effecting a game by operating it. This board effect device 44 changes the display device 4 from the state shown in FIG.
It is operable toward the center of 1.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 that provides a starting condition for the normal pattern variation display game. A game ball that has won the normal pattern starting gate 34 (a game ball passing through the normal pattern starting gate 34) is detected by a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there are two general winning openings 3
5 is arranged, and one general prize winning port 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and on the right side of the special variable prize winning device 38 which will be described later. The game balls that have entered these general winning holes 35 are detected by a winning hole switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is a starting winning opening 36 that forms a first starting winning opening (starting winning area) that provides the starting condition for the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game). (start port 1) is provided. A game ball that has entered the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, below the starting winning opening 36, an out opening 30a for recovering game balls that have not won a winning opening or the like is provided.
In addition, on the right side of the center case 40 at a lower position than the normal figure start gate 34,
A normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning port, starting winning area) that gives the starting condition of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) is provided with a movable member 37b which can be converted into a state in which the upper end side is turned in a direction in which it falls to the right so that the game balls can easily flow in, and this movable member. 37b is normally kept in a closed state (disadvantageous state for the player) in which game balls cannot flow in, being almost vertical.
Then, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the upper end side is turned so that it falls to the right by the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, and the normal fluctuation is performed. The winning device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which game balls can easily flow. A game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It is also possible to make it possible to win prizes even when the normal variable prize winning device 37 is closed, and make it more difficult to win prizes in the closed state than in the open state. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 corresponds to a normal electric accessory (general electric).

A downflow path 91 through which game balls can flow down is formed on the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, and game balls that do not win the normal variable winning device 37 flow down through the downflow path 91. - 特許庁A guiding portion 93 is provided below the flow-down passage 91 . The upper surface 94 of the guide portion 93 is formed as an inclined surface that descends to the left, and the game balls flowing downward are received by the upper surface 94 and guided to the left where a special variable winning device 38 described later exists. .

In addition, at the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is a special variable winning device (big winning opening) 38 that can be converted between a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept game balls depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. is set. The special variable winning device 38 includes an opening/closing member (opening/closing door) 3
8c, and depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game as an auxiliary game, the opening and closing member 3
8 c closes the big winning opening (disadvantageous closed state for the player) to the open state (advantageous state for the player) in which the opening/closing member 38 c retracts and can receive the game balls flowing down the game area 32 . Convert. That is, the special variable prize winning device 38 is a large prize winning opening (
Equipped with a big winning mouth), during the big hit game state (first special game state) due to the results of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the small hit game state due to the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game ( During the second special game state), the closed state of the large prize winning port is changed to the open state to facilitate the inflow of the game balls into the large winning port, thereby giving the player a predetermined game value (prize balls). is to be given. In addition, inside the big winning opening (winning area), a big winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening is arranged. .

In addition, the special variable winning device 38 includes a guide channel for guiding the winning game ball into the winning opening and a V channel formed by branching from the guide channel. The special variable prize winning device 38 is provided with a V door at a position serving as an inflow portion of the V flow path. The V door is slid forward and backward by a specific area solenoid 38d (see FIG. 3) to block the inflow of game balls into the V channel, and retreats backward to prevent game balls from entering the V channel. It can be changed to an allowable state that allows inflow. In addition, the special variable winning device 38 is provided with a specific area switch 38e (see FIG. 3) for detecting game balls that have flowed into the V channel.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the probability state after the end of the special game state is not determined by the jackpot symbol, but the game ball flows into the V flow path in the special game state and the specific area switch is activated. A high probability state is set based on detection at 38e.

Also, the special variable winning device 38 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) large winning opening switches 38a. Also, the number of the special variable winning device 38 is not limited to one, and two may be provided. , x (see FIG. 3) may be provided as a whole.

A warp port (warp entrance) 39a is provided on the left side portion of the center case 40 . The game ball that has flowed into the warp channel from the warp port 39a rolls on the stage inside the center case 40, and a part of it is guided to the warp exit 39b. The warp exit 39b is located directly above the start winning opening 36, and the game ball guided to the warp exit 39b is pushed to the starting winning opening 36.
It becomes easier to win prizes.

In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, of the game area 32 in which game balls flow down, the area to the left of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the area to the right of the center case 40 is the right game area. It is said that Then, the player adjusts the shooting momentum and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left hitting), so that the start winning opening 36 and the general winning opening 35 (the general winning opening on the right side of the special variable winning device 38) 35) can be aimed at, and by launching a game ball to the right game area (so-called right hitting), a normal figure start gate 34, a normal variable winning device 37,
It is possible to aim for a prize in the special variable prize winning device 38 or the like.

In addition, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game that constitute the special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34 A collective display device 50 that displays a normal figure variation display game triggered by winning a prize and displays various information
is provided.

The collective display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of an LED or the like, a special figure 1 reserved display unit 52, a special figure 1 design display unit 53, a special figure 2 design display unit 54, and a general design design display unit. 55, a normal map reservation display section 56, and a state display section 57 (see FIG. 5). Details of the collective display device 50 will be described later.

Next, the control system of the gaming machine will be explained using FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the gaming machine control system of the first embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100 , which is a main control device (main board) for overall control of the game, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111 . A CPU (Central Processing Unit) unit 110 having an input port 120, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a CPU
It consists of a data bus 140 and the like connecting between the unit 110, the input unit 120 and the output unit 130. FIG.

The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator. An oscillation circuit (
crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are powered by DC (Di
rect current) 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 V, etc. are supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 is an AC (
Alternating Current)-DC converter or DC32V voltage to DC12V, DC5V
A normal power supply unit 4 having a DC-DC converter or the like that generates a lower level DC voltage such as
10, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM (random access memory) of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and the game control device 100 is provided with power failure occurrence and recovery. A control signal generator 430 or the like is provided for generating and outputting a control signal such as a power outage monitoring signal or a reset signal.

In the first embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, , may be provided on the main substrate. game board 30
And the game control device 100 is to be replaced when the model is changed. By providing the , it is possible to remove it from the object of replacement and to reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the gaming microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data is supplied to the built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is turned off. Control signal generating section 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by normal power supply section 410, for example, and detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, based on which the information stored in the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is the gaming microcomputer 1
It is read repeatedly in the main loop of the main program executed by 11. A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a setting value change switch 126 and a setting key switch 127 . Setting value change switch 126 is, for example, a push switch, and detects a pressing operation. The setting key switch 127 allows switching between an ON state and an OFF state by inserting a setting key. The game control device 100 can change the settings related to the game performance, and the settings stored in the RAM are retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. For example, the game control device 100 can change the hit probability of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game according to the setting of 6 stages.

The game control device 100 transitions the control state to a setting change mode in which the setting of the game machine 10 can be changed when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state. For example, the game control device 100 can cyclically change settings 1 to 6 by detecting a pressing operation of the setting value change switch 126 while displaying the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting change mode. The probability setting value display device 136 is a display device capable of displaying a setting value.
D and mounted on the board.

Also, the game control device 100 shifts the control state to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting of the game machine 10 can be confirmed when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the OFF state. . For example, the game control device 100 displays the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting confirmation mode.

The game microcomputer 111 has a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, a read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B and an RA that can be read and written at any time
Equipped with M111C.

The ROM 111B nonvolatilely stores immutable information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area for the CPU 111A during game control or a storage area for various signals and random values. used as ROM 111B or R
An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM) may be used as the AM 111C.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The variation pattern table stores variation pattern random number 1, variation pattern random number 2, and variation pattern random number 3 stored as starting memory in CPU 111A.
is a table for determining a variation pattern with reference to. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.)
, Contains a table (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern before reaching the reach state.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the game state becomes a game state (special game state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is set, at the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed. A display state in which a display result that is derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for becoming a special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not have And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed in a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called all-rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition to become a special result mode (for example, the same The state of the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this ready-to-win state.

This ready-to-reach state includes a plurality of ready-to-reach effects, and as ready-to-win effects with different possibilities of deriving special result modes (different expected values), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 Reach (SP2 Reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 Reach) and Premier Reach are set. The expected value is higher in the order of "no reach"<"normalreach"<"special 1 reach"<"special 2 reach"<"special 3 reach"<"premierreach". Further, this ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is lost). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state occurs is a state with a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the case in which the ready-to-win state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices to output the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a hit in the special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining the jackpot pattern, and a variation pattern (various types) in the special figure variation display game. Random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining reach and execution time of variation display game in variation display without reach, hit random numbers for determining hit of normal figure variation display game, etc. and an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113
A clock generator is provided for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds (ms)) for the CPU 111A and a clock for updating the random number generation circuit based on the above.

In addition, the CPU 111A uses the ROM 111B in processing related to the special figure variation display game.
Any one variation pattern table is acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the . Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result of the special figure variation display game (hit (big hit or small win) or loss) and the probability state of the special figure variation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current game state (time-saving operating state), the number of start memories, etc., from among a plurality of variation pattern tables, select one variation pattern table. to get. where CP
U111A constitutes variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in ROM 111B when executing a special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like. is driven to perform control for paying out prize balls. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit of the ball lending machine attached to the gaming machine 10,
Perform control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes the starting opening 1 switch 36 in the starting winning opening 36
a, starting port 2 switch 37a in normal variable winning device 37, gate switch 34a in normal starting gate 34, winning port switch 35a, special winning port switch 38 of special variable winning device 38
a, It is connected to the specific area switch 38e of the special variable prize winning device 38, and a negative logic signal such as 11 V at the high level and 7 V at the low level supplied from these switches is input, and 0
An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided for converting to a positive logic signal of V-5V. The proximity I/F 121 also receives a detection signal from a board radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine 10 . Also, the proximity I/F 121 has an input range of 7V-11
By setting V, it is possible to detect an abnormal state such as an improper short circuit in the lead wire of a sensor or proximity switch, disconnection of a sensor or switch from a connector, or a floating lead wire due to disconnection. and is configured to output an anomaly detection signal.

In addition, when explaining the winning opening switch 35a, the winning opening switch 35a is 1 in FIG.
, but actually a plurality of (n) winning opening switches 35a (three in this embodiment) are provided on the game board 30, and the respective signals are adjacent to each other through different signal lines. I
/F121. Also, in FIG. 3, the large winning opening switch 38a is shown as one block, but actually a plurality of (x) large winning opening switches 38a (three in this embodiment)
) are provided on the game board 30 . And these plurality of big winning opening switches 38a
Either connected by different signal lines, or, for example, the switch and the game control device 10
It is connected to the game control device 100 by a method called wired OR on a relay board (not shown) existing between 0 (main board). The board radio wave sensor 62 and a magnetic sensor 61 to be described later may also be connected by a plurality of different signal lines, or may be similarly connected to the game control device 100 by a method called wired OR.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . In addition, the proximity I/F
121 outputs, starting port 1 switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a, gate switch 34a, prize winning port switch 35a, big winning port switch 38a, and specific area switch 3
The detection signal of 8 e is input to the second input port 123 . It should be noted that the output of signals from the starter 1 switch 36a and the starter 2 switch 37a, which are the starter switches in Special Figure 1 (proximity I/F 12
1) is shown by one signal line in FIG. 3, but there are actually two lines.

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 . Further, the third input port 124 receives the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the game machine 10 or the like, and the glass frame open detection switch provided on the glass frame 15 of the game machine 10 or the like. 63 detection signal, detection signal of the main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the game machine 10, detection signal of the setting value change switch 126, detection signal of the setting key switch 127, payout control A touch switch signal (a signal based on the input of the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) from the device 200 is input.

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 through the relay board 70 to a test fire test device (not shown). Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation. It's becoming

The data held by the second input port 123 is obtained by asserting (effective level ), it can be read out. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

In addition, the input unit 120 receives the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112, the payout control device 20
Frame radio wave illegal signal from 0 (signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), payout busy signal (whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands signal), payout error status signal (status signal indicating payout error)
, Shoot ball break switch signal (signal indicating lack of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 at a predetermined amount or more (full)
A first input port 122 that takes in an out-ball detection switch signal (a signal that is output when an out-ball is detected) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. is provided.

The out-ball detection switch signal is a signal output from an out-sensor (not shown) each time it detects one out-ball of the gaming machine 10 . For example, the out ball detection switch signal is provided in a discharge channel (not shown) between a discharge port (not shown) for discharging game balls (out balls) from the gaming machine 10 and the out port 30a. The out-ball detection switch signal is a game performance per predetermined operation (eg, 60,000 out-balls)
base), and the calculated game performance is displayed on the performance display device 135 . Note that the out ball detection switch signal may be input to the effect control device 300 .
In that case, the out-ball detection switch signal may be used for determination of an operating state that triggers switching to a game presentation or a customer waiting screen display. For example, the performance display device 135 is a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and can display game performance in decimal or hexadecimal.

Also, the gaming machine 10 may be provided with a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration, and the detection signal of this vibration sensor switch may be input to the first input port 122 or the third input port 124 .

In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as power failure monitoring signals and reset signals from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from the signal. A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test-firing test signal held at the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus. is configured to also,
The reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third input ports 122 , 123 and 124 of the input section 120 . The data set to each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, the serial communication from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 is one-way communication in which a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a trial firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, etc. via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. It should be noted that detection signals of switches that do not need to be processed, such as starting switches, output from the proximity I/F 121 are supplied to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor 61 and board radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be directly supplied to the test-firing test device, are temporarily taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, when the game machine is used as a game signal. An error signal indicating the uncontrollable state is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus.
The relay board 70 is provided with a port for taking in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector for relaying the signal line of the detection signal of the switch not via the buffer, and the like. ing. The game microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
A chip enable signal CE (not shown) output from 1 is also supplied, and signals of ports selectively controlled by this chip enable signal CE are supplied to the test-firing test apparatus.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and outputs the opening/closing data of the special winning opening solenoid 38b for opening and closing the opening/closing member 38c of the special variable winning apparatus 38 (large winning opening), and the V door of the special variable winning apparatus 38. A first output port 134a is provided for outputting opening/closing data for the specific area solenoid 38d to be opened/closed, opening/closing data for the general electric solenoid 37c for opening/closing the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37, and display data for the performance display device 135. It is

The output unit 130 is also provided with a second output port 134 b for outputting display data of the probability set value display device 136 . The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 134c for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. a fourth output port 1 for outputting on/off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of
34d is provided.

Also, the output unit 130 outputs information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71 .
A fifth output port 134e is provided for outputting to. The external information terminal board 71 includes:
A photorelay is provided, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game parlor, and information about the game machine 10 is transmitted to the external device via the photorelay. can be supplied to Part of the information supplied to the external device is output from the fourth output port 134d. Also, a launch permission signal is output to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132 from the fifth output port 134e.

Further, the output unit 130 receives opening/closing data signals of the big winning opening solenoid 38b, the specific area solenoid 38d, and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the first output port 134a, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. (Drive circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b for outputting an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the display device 50 output from the third output port 134c, and a batch output from the fourth output port 134d An external information signal is supplied to an external device such as a management device from a third driver 138c, a fifth output port 134e, or a fourth output port 134d that outputs an on/off drive signal for a digit line on the current drawing side of the display device 50. A fourth driver 138d for outputting to the information terminal board 71 and a fifth driver 138e for receiving a display data signal of the performance display device 135 output from the first output port 134a and generating and outputting a drive signal for the performance display device 135 are provided. It is

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid operating at 32V. Also, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50 is supplied with DC 12V. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line. A power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the first output port 134a, the first driver 138a, etc.
The output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, may be provided on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board. Also, the performance display device 135, or the fifth driver 138e and the performance display device 135 may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main substrate but on the side of an external substrate (not shown). .

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 490 . photo coupler 139
is configured to enable two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 490 by serial communication. For the avoidance of doubt, the transmission and reception of such data shall be
Since the serial communication terminals of the gaming microcomputer 111 are used in the same manner as a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the production control device of the first embodiment.
The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC
), and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , a sound source LSI 31 for controlling the output of sounds for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.
4.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
PROM 321 consisting of ROM (programmable read only memory), RAM 322 providing a work area, and FeRAM (which can retain memory contents even if power is not supplied at the time of a power failure).
Ferroelectric RAM) 323, and an RTC (real time clock) 338 that constitutes timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM 311a that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. FIG. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes a command (effect command) from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the effect, instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 on the reproduction sound, and instructs the decoration lamp. lighting, motor and solenoid drive control,
It also executes processing such as performance time management.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a working area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also has an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM 326 used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325.
is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From VDP 312 to main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of display device 41 with lighting of decoration lamps provided on glass frame 15 and game board 30 is transmitted.
C. Synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. Note that VDP312
to the main control microcomputer 311. Interrupt signals INT0 to n to inform the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM, and a wait for notifying that the main control microcomputer 311 is in a state of waiting for reception of commands and data. Signals such as WAIT are also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling: small amplitude signal transmission) method. From the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, video data, horizontal synchronizing signal HSY
NC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is displayed on the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 .

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314 .
The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . Also, an interrupt signal I
NT is to be input. The performance control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier or the like for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The resulting voice is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure pending number command, decoration special figure command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are transmitted to the production control command signal (production command ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
operates at DC5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, so the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LE that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40).
A D control circuit 332, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, a game board 30 (a center case 40 is ) provided in the board production device 44 (for example, a movable accessory or the like that enhances the production effect in cooperation with the production display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . It should be noted that the glass frame 15 may be provided with a frame effect device having a driving source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and may be provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes the effect button switch 25a of the effect button 25, the setting switch 29a of the option setting unit 29, and the effect accessory switch 47 (effect motor switch) to detect the on / off state of the main control microcomputer 311 and the function of inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300 is detected and detected to the main control microcomputer 311 A switch input circuit 336 having a function of inputting a signal is provided. Note that in FIG. 4, the option setting unit 29
are collectively referred to as a setting switch 29a for the sake of convenience. , and a detection signal indicating each state of each switch is input to the main control microcomputer 311 .

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 is the effect control device 300 having the configuration as described above.
32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs, 32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, and 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs. DC5, which is the power supply voltage of the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC 15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V as the main control microcomputer 311, DC 3.3 V is based on DC 5 V.
The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2V. Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314
and an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal), and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. A cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the performance control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the performance control device 300 is powered on. Moreover, the circuit board which comprises the production|presentation control apparatus 300 is equivalent to a sub-control board (it is also called a sub-board).

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the normal figure start gate 3
Based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in 4, the random number for the hit judgment of the normal pattern is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the normal pattern fluctuation display game is displayed. A process of judging hit or miss is performed. Then, after the identification pattern (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time on the general pattern display unit 55 of the collective display device 50, processing is performed to display the normal pattern variation display game to be stopped and displayed. When the result of this normal pattern variation display game is a hit, the normal pattern display unit 55 displays a special result mode corresponding to each of the first to third hit stop symbols, and the general electric solenoid 37c. to open the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, the normal pattern display unit 55 is controlled to display the result of the loss.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, the starting winning prize (starting memory) is stored, and based on this starting memory, the first special figure fluctuation display game A random number value for judging a big hit is extracted and compared with the judging value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process for judging a hit or miss of the first special figure variation display game is performed. In addition, a starting memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and based on this starting memory, the second special figure variable display game is used for judging the big hit. The random value is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of judging the hit or miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (production control command, production command) including the determination results of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game to the production control device 300. do. Then, after the identification pattern (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the collective display device 50, the process of displaying the special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed. do That is, the game control device 100, starting winning area of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37)
It constitutes game control means for controlling the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game.

Also, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs processing for displaying a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the setting of the production state, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the processing of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling effects related to games (such as variable display games).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode or the small win result mode in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. is displayed, and processing for generating a special game state or a small winning game state (that is, processing for executing a special game or a small winning game) is performed. In the process of generating a special game state when the result of the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game results in a big hit, the CPU 111A, for example, operates the special variation winning device 38 by the big winning opening solenoid 38b. The opening/closing member 38c is opened, and control is performed to enable the inflow of game balls into the big winning opening. In this special game state, the CPU 111A determines that either a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) win a prize in the big winning opening, or a predetermined openable time elapses after the opening of the big winning opening. It is assumed that one round is to open the big winning opening until it is achieved, and control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeated) this for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, a small winning game state is generated when the result of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) or the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) is a small win. In the processing, the CPU 111A, for example, opens the opening/closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by the big winning opening solenoid 38b, and performs control to enable the inflow of game balls into the big winning opening.

The opening/closing operation pattern (opening/closing operation mode) of the big winning opening performed in these small winning game states is, for example, such that the opening/closing member is kept open for 200 msec four times at intervals of 1500 msec. In this way, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening/closing control means for controlling opening and closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. When the result of the special figure variation display game is lost, the CPU 111A controls the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the collective display device 50 to display the result mode of the difference.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high-probability state is
It is a state in which the probability of winning results in the special figure variation display game is higher than in the normal probability state.
In addition, even if a high probability state is reached based on the result mode of either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state, general-purpose high-probability state) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this time-saving state, the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability) is set to a high probability (normal pattern high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal pattern low probability state). is possible. As a result, the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 per unit time is increased more than when the normal variable winning device 37 is in the normal low probability state. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in this embodiment, the normal pattern probability is set to "0" so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal game state.

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 ms, and the normal pattern stop time for displaying the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 ms, When the normal fluctuation display game results in a winning result and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal electric open time) and the number of times of opening (for example,
500 ms x 1 time), the opening time of the second hit stop pattern (electrical open time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times), the open time of the third hit stop pattern (electrical open time) and opening number of times (
For example, it is possible to set it to be 1700 msec.times.3 times).

In addition, the execution time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the normal pattern stop time, the number of times the normal pattern is opened, and the normal pattern open time are set appropriately so as to control the normal pattern fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 to the time saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (ordinary figure fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game to be the second fluctuation display time shorter than the first fluctuation display time. (eg 10000 ms is 1000 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal pattern stop time for displaying the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game to be a second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms 70
4 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation display game results in a winning result and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (general electric open time) is set to the normal state (normal low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than one opening time (eg 100 ms to 1352 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, the number of openings of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the number of openings of the normal electric power) is greater than the first number of openings (for example, two times) for one winning result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set a second opening number of times (eg, four times). In addition, in the time-saving state, the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability) is changed to the normal probability in the case of the normal operation state (normal pattern low probability state, for example, 1/
251) can be set to a higher probability (normal pattern high probability state, eg, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing one or more of the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal pattern stop time, the normal pattern opening number of times, the normal pattern opening time, and the normal pattern probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-saving states with different things to be changed. Alternatively, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected when a win is achieved. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Moreover, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated. In addition, the time saving state is the normal electricity support state (under normal electricity support or during electricity support)
can also be called

Next, the configuration of the collective display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a batch display device according to the first embodiment. The collective display device 50 includes 7-segment LED_d1 and 7-segment LED_d2, and 16 LEDs from LED_d3 to LED_d18.
Have D. The collective display device 50 includes a 7-segment LED_d1 and a 7-segment LED_d
2, and LED_d3 to LED_d18 display various states.

Collective display device 50, by allocating various status display functions to 7-segment LED_d1 and 7-segment LED_d2, and LED_d3 to LED_d18, round display unit 51, special figure 1 reserved display unit 52, and special figure 1 pattern display unit 53 , a special figure 2 pattern display part 54, a normal figure pattern display part 55, a general figure reservation display part 56, a state display part 57, and a special figure 2 reservation display part 58. The round display unit 51 includes four LEDs, LED_d3 to LED_d6.
The number of rounds in the special game is displayed by the lighting mode of . The special figure 1 pending display unit 52 displays the number of reservations in the special figure 1 game by the lighting mode of two LEDs, LED_d11 and LED_d12. The special figure 1 pattern display unit 53 has 8 L of 7 segment LED_d1
The pattern in the special figure 1 game is displayed by the lighting mode of the ED (7 segment LEDs and 1 dot LED). The special figure 2 design display unit 54 displays the design in the special figure 2 game by the lighting mode of the 8 LEDs (7 segment LEDs and 1 dot LED) of the 7 segment LED_d2. The general pattern display unit 55 displays the patterns in the general pattern game by lighting modes of three LEDs, LED_d8, LED_d10, and LED_d18. The normal-pattern reservation display unit 56 displays the number of reserves in the normal-pattern game by the lighting modes of the two LEDs, LED_d15 and LED_d16. The state display unit 57 displays LED_d7, LE
The game state in the special figure game is displayed by the lighting modes of the three LEDs D_d9 and LED_d17. The special figure 2 reservation display unit 58 displays the number of reservations in the special figure 2 game by the lighting mode of two LEDs, LED_d13 and LED_d14.

The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing and timer interrupt processing which is performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing of the game control device of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 10. FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of main processing according to the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of the main processing of the first embodiment.
FIG. 8 is a diagram (part 3) showing a flowchart of the main processing of the first embodiment. Figure 9
4 is a diagram (part 4) showing a flowchart of main processing of the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram (No. 5) illustrating a flowchart of the main processing of the first embodiment.

The main process is started by the control section (game microcomputer 111) when the power is turned on. In this main process, first, a process of prohibiting interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then a stack pointer setting process of setting the stack pointer, which is the top address of the area where the values of registers and the like are saved when an interrupt occurs. (Step S2) is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). RAM11
The address range of 1C is 0000h to 01FFh, with 00h or 01h being the higher order. In step S4, 00h at the top of the address range of the RAM 111C is set.

Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step S5).
. The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is outputting a firing stop signal, and the shooting of game balls is prohibited.

After that, the state of input port 1 (first input port 122) is read into the first register (eg B register) (step S6), and then the state of input port 3 (third input port 124) is read into the second register (eg C register) (step S7).

Here, predetermined bits of the first register are masked and other bits are cleared (step S8). For example, only the 2nd bit of the B register corresponding to the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 is held, and the 0th and 1st bits and the 3rd to 7th bits are cleared. Then, predetermined bits of the second register are masked and other bits are cleared (step S9). For example, only the 4th bit of the C register corresponding to the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 is held, and the 0th to 3rd bits and the 5th to 7th bits are cleared.

The information in the first register is integrated into the second register, and the information held by the second register is stored in RAM1.
11C is retained as reference information (step S10). For example, the logical sum of the B register and the C register is stored in the C register, and the C register is held as a state reference register.

For example, the value "00000000B" of the state reference register (C register) is "0" with the 0th and 1st bits, the 3rd and 5th to 7th bits cleared, and the 2nd bit is It is “0” corresponding to the ON detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and indicates that the fourth bit is “0” corresponding to the ON detection signal from the setting key switch 127 . That is, the value "00000000B" of the state reference register indicates the setting change state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (ON) and the setting key switch 127 is on (ON).

Also, the value "00010000B" of the state reference register is the 0th bit and the 1st bit,
The 3rd and 5th to 7th bits are cleared to '0' and the 2nd bit is RA
It is "0" corresponding to the ON detection signal from the M initialization switch 112, and indicates that the fourth bit is "1" corresponding to the OFF detection signal from the setting key switch 127. FIG. i.e.
The value "00010000B" of the state reference register indicates the RAM initialization state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (ON) and the setting key switch 127 is off (OFF).

Also, the value "00000100B" of the state reference register is the 0th bit and the 1st bit,
The 3rd and 5th to 7th bits are cleared to '0' and the 2nd bit is RA
It is "1" corresponding to the OFF detection signal from the M initialization switch 112, and indicates that the fourth bit is "0" corresponding to the ON detection signal from the setting key switch 127. FIG. i.e.
The value "00000100B" of the state reference register indicates the setting confirmation state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (OFF) and the setting key switch 127 is on (ON).

Also, the value "00010100B" of the state reference register is the 0th bit and the 1st bit,
The 3rd and 5th to 7th bits are cleared to '0' and the 2nd bit is RA
It is "1" corresponding to the OFF detection signal from the M initialization switch 112, and indicates that the fourth bit is "1" corresponding to the OFF detection signal from the setting key switch 127. FIG. i.e.
The value "00010100B" of the state reference register indicates the power restoration (recovery from power failure) state in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (OFF) and the setting key switch 127 is off (OFF).

As a result, the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 are held in the C register. Since the storage location (second bit) of the detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 in the B register and the storage location (fourth bit) of the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 in the C register are different, the B register and C The detection signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and the detection signal from the setting key switch 127 are preserved without being lost even by the logical sum of the registers.

After that, processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S11). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, subordinate control means (for example, payout control device 200 and production control device 300, etc.) that performs various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for waiting for the program of the slave control device to start normally. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 10
It is possible to prevent the slave control means from failing to receive the command by sending the command to the slave control means before 0 rises first and the slave control means rises. That is, the game control device 100 serves as standby means for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying activation of the main control means and waiting for activation of the sub-control means when power is turned on.

Also, the timing of the power-on delay timer is used to determine the validity of the data held in the RAM area (
This is performed using a storage area not subject to checksum calculation (RAM area, registers, etc. not subject to validity determination). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, there is no need to exclude a part of the RAM area from the calculation, so control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

The detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is stored in the second register (C register). Operations can be saved reliably. That is, if the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 112 may be operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the RAM initialization switch may be changed from power-on until the standby time has elapsed. It is necessary to continue to operate 112. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, even if you do not perform such troublesome operations, it will be detected by performing operations immediately after turning on the power, and initialization operations performed when turning on the power will be detected. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the

The second register (C register) stores the detection signal of the setting key switch 127. By storing the signal before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting key switch 127 can be prevented. can be reliably detected. That is, after the waiting time has elapsed, the setting key switch 12 is
If the state of 7 is read, the setting key switch 127 is operated after the waiting time has elapsed.
or continue to operate the setting key switch 127 from power-on until the standby time elapses. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, even if you do not perform such a troublesome operation, it will be detected by performing an operation immediately after turning on the power. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a setting confirmation operation cannot be accepted.

Next, processing for setting a power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds) (step S11
), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (
Steps S12 to S16) are performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read through the port and data bus and the number of times (for example, two times) is set (step S12) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. A determination is made (step S13).

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S13; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks set in step S12 (step S1
4). If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step S14; N), the process returns to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S13). Further, when the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S14;
Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, wait until the power supply of the gaming machine 10 is cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and appropriately deal with problems that occur when the power is turned on. be able to.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with problems that occur when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the memory contents at the time of the previous power shutdown are still retained.
When a power failure occurs here, there is no need to perform backup processing or the like. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM 111C, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S13; N), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by "-1" (step S15), and the timer value changes to "0". ” (step S16). If the timer value is not 0 (step S16; N), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S12). Also, if the timer value is "0
' (step S16; Y), that is, when the standby time is over, the RAM 11
Permission is granted to access a readable and writable RWM (Read Write Memory) such as 1C and EEPROM (step S17), and output off data to all output ports (set to no output state).
(step S18).

Next, the serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111,
Used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step S19
).

In step S20, processing for activating a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed.

In step S21, processing for setting a RAM abnormality flag is performed. It should be noted that the setting of the RAM abnormality flag is temporary and can be updated in the process of checking for abnormality of the RAM that will be executed later.

In step S22, it is determined whether or not the value of power failure inspection area 1 in RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah). If the value of power failure inspection area 1 is normal (step S22; Y), it is determined whether the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S23), blackout inspection area 2
is normal (step S23; Y), checksum calculation processing (step S24) is performed to calculate the checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM.

In addition, in the checksum calculation process, the data of the work area for game control and the data of the work area for status display may be calculated as a checksum, or the data of the work area for game control and the work area for status display The checksum may be calculated separately from the data of the area, or the checksum may be calculated only from the data of the work area for game control. The work area for game control is a work area used for game control among the storage areas in the RWM. The work area for status display is a work area used for status display among the storage areas in the RWM.

Next, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in step S24 and the checksum at the time of power failure match (step S25). If it is determined that the checksums match (normal) (step S25; Y) clears the RAM abnormality flag provisionally set in step S21 (step S26).

If it is determined that the checksums do not match (not normal) (step S25;
N) bypasses step S26 and proceeds to step S27, thereby making the RAM abnormality flag provisionally set in step S21 definite. Even when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S22; N or step S23; N), step S26 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S27. The RAM abnormality flag becomes definite.

In step S27, the second register (C register) is referred to and the setting key switch 12 is
7 is ON and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON. When the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is ON and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON, the process proceeds to step S33, and the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is ON and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON. If not on, step S
Proceed to 28.

Since the game control device 100 holds the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 in the second register (C register), the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the RAM initialization The detection signal of the change switch 112 can be determined at the same time. In addition, the game control device 100 detects the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the RAM
Since the detection signal of the initialization switch 112 is held in the second register (C register),
The detection signal of the setting key switch 127 and the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 before the validity of the RAM is determined can be used as objects of determination.

In step S28, the controller determines whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is ON. The control unit proceeds to step S30 when the RAM abnormality flag is on (that is, when the RAM abnormality flag is set), and when the RAM abnormality flag is not on (that is, when the RAM abnormality flag is set).
If the abnormality flag is cleared), the process proceeds to step S29.

In step S29, the control unit determines whether or not the setting change mode flag is on. The control unit proceeds to step S48 when the setting change mode flag is on, and proceeds to step S30 when the setting change mode flag is not on.

Steps S30 to S32 are the processing executed when the RAM is abnormal or when the power is shut off during setting and the RAM is not cleared and the system is restarted. step S3
At 0, the control unit transmits a command for main abnormality error notification to the effect control device 300 .
Thereby, the production control device 300 performs the production control corresponding to the main abnormality error notification command. For example, the effect control device 300 receives a command of main abnormality error notification, displays a message guiding a restart accompanied by RAM clearing on the display device 41, or outputs sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b. In addition, the effect control device 300 receives a command for notifying the main abnormality error, and notifies the main abnormality error by the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44.例文帳に追加

In step S31, the control section displays the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped on the performance display device 135.
output to At this time, the controller can display the status corresponding to the main abnormality error on the performance display device 135 . In addition, the control unit outputs the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped to the probability set value display device 136 . At this time, the control unit can display numerical values and characters that are not included in the probability setting values on the probability setting value display device 136 . It should be noted that the control unit, L when the game is stopped
The 7-segment display data including the ED display data may be output to the collective display device 50 . At this time, the control unit may turn off all of the collective display device 50 or turn on all of them.

At step S32, the control section sends the ON data of the security signal to the external information terminal board 71.
Output from At this time, the control section turns off the output data of other signals output from the external information terminal board 71 . The control unit repeats steps S31 and S32 and waits for power shutdown. That is, the gaming machine 10 outputs the security signal from the external information terminal board 71 until the power is cut off. In addition, the game machine 10 waits for the power shutdown,
No signal other than the security signal is output from the external information terminal board 71 .

Note that the control unit does not prohibit RAM access in the repeated execution of steps S31 and S32 until power shutdown is awaited. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can display the NMI (No
When an n-Maskable Interrupt occurs, the return address can be stored in RAM to reduce the risk of program runaway. In this way, the control unit waits for power shutdown in step S31.
And the storage contents of the RAM during the repeated execution of step S32 are not protected by RAM access prohibition, but since RAM clearing at the time of restarting becomes the condition for game control start, the danger that the storage contents of RAM are not protected is limited there is That is, the game machine 10 obtains the effect of reducing the risk of program runaway while limiting the risk that the contents stored in the RAM will not be protected. In addition, the control unit does not prohibit RAM access in the repeated execution of steps S31 and S32 until the power is turned off, so that steps S31 and S32
can call subroutines to improve program efficiency.

Steps S33 to S36 are processes related to setting change preparation.
27, the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on and the RAM initialization switch 11
This processing is executed when the detection signal of 2 is on.

In step S33, the controller determines whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is ON. The control unit proceeds to step S34 when the RAM abnormality flag is on, and proceeds to step S35 when the RAM abnormality flag is not on.

In step S34, the controller clears the set value since the RAM abnormality flag is ON. The setting value may be cleared by setting an invalid value as the setting value, or by setting the most disadvantageous value for the player from the standpoint of anti-fraud measures.

In step S35, the control unit performs a process of setting a setting change mode flag. The setting change mode flag is a flag indicating whether or not the setting of the gaming machine 10 is being changed. The flag is cleared (reset).

In step S<b>36 , the control unit transmits a setting change command to the effect control device 300 . Thereby, the production control device 300 performs production control corresponding to the command during setting change. For example, the effect control device 300 receives a command during setting change, displays a message guiding that the setting is being changed on the display device 41, or displays the speaker 19a, 1
Sound is output from 9b. In addition, the effect control device 300 receives a setting change command and notifies the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44 that the setting is being changed.

Step S37 is a process executed after preparation for setting change (steps S33 to S36) or after preparation for setting confirmation (steps S49 and S50). In step S37, the controller sets the security signal control timer to 128 ms. As a result, the gaming machine 10 outputs the security signal at least until the security signal control timer times out.

Steps S38 to S40 are processes related to waiting for the end of setting change or waiting for the end of setting confirmation. The game machine 10 outputs and sets the security signal in step S37, thereby making it possible to externally recognize the execution of processing related to waiting for the end of setting change or waiting for the end of setting confirmation.

After permitting the interrupt (step S38), the control unit refers to the second register (C register) to determine whether or not the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is off (step S
39). When the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is off, the control section proceeds to step S5.
5, and when the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is not off, the process proceeds to step S40.

In step S40, the control unit determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. In addition, the control unit
Occurrence of a power failure can be determined by continuously detecting the power failure monitoring signal for a predetermined period of time. The control unit proceeds to step S41 if a power failure has occurred, and proceeds to step S if a power failure has not occurred.
Proceed to 39. That is, the control unit waits for the setting key to be turned off until the power failure occurs in a state in which the interrupt is permitted in step S38.

When the control unit determines that a power failure has occurred, processing for prohibiting interruption (step S4
1), a process of outputting OFF data to all output ports (step S42) is performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S43
), the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S44).
Furthermore, checksum calculation processing (step S45) for calculating the checksum when the RWM is powered off, and processing for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area (step S46).
) is performed, a process of prohibiting access to the RAM (step S47) is performed, and then the game machine waits for the power supply to be cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-insertion.

Step S48 is executed when it is determined in step S29 that the setting change mode flag is ON. At step S48, the control section refers to the second register (C register) to determine whether or not the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on. The control unit
If the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is on, the process proceeds to step S49, and if the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is not on, the process proceeds to step S51.

Steps S49 and S50 are processes related to setting confirmation preparation. step S4
At 9, the control unit performs processing for setting a setting confirmation mode flag. The setting confirmation mode flag is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming machine 10 is confirming the settings. The setting confirmation mode flag is set when the settings are being confirmed, and the setting confirmation mode is being set when the settings are not being confirmed. The flag is cleared (reset). In step S<b>50 , the control unit transmits a setting confirmation command to the effect control device 300 . Thereby, the production control device 300 performs production control corresponding to the command during setting confirmation. For example, the effect control device 300 receives a command during setting confirmation, displays a message guiding that the setting is being confirmed on the display device 41, or outputs sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. In addition, production control device 3
00 receives the setting confirmation command and notifies that the setting is being confirmed by the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44. - 特許庁After that, the control unit proceeds to step S37.

On the other hand, when the controller determines in step S48 that the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is not on, it executes step S51. In step S51, the control unit refers to the second register (C register) and determines whether or not the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on. If the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is on, the controller proceeds to step S52, and if the detection signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 is not on, the controller proceeds to step S58. That is, the game machine 10 proceeds to execute processing related to RAM initialization (RAM clear) upon detection of start-up accompanied by pressing operation of the RAM initialization switch 112, and
Upon detection of start-up without pressing of the AM initialization switch 112, the execution of processing relating to recovery from a power failure proceeds.

Next, a description will be given of the processing related to RAM initialization performed after step S52. R.
In the process related to AM initialization, the control unit clears the RAM areas other than the set values to 0 (zero clear) (step S52), and saves the initial values at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (
step S53). For example, the control unit sets the RAM clear head address 2 as the head address when clearing the RAM, and clears the area (work for game control) of the storage area (area not including the access prohibited area) of the RWM (for example, the RAM 111C). area) is cleared to zero.

Since the setting change mode flag and the setting confirmation mode flag are included in the data of the area to be cleared, they are cleared by clearing the data of the area to be cleared to zero.

In step S<b>54 , the control section transmits a command for RAM initialization to the effect control device 300 . Thereby, the production control device 300 performs production control corresponding to the command at the time of RAM initialization. For example, the effect control device 300 receives a command at the time of RAM initialization, displays a message guiding that the RAM has been initialized on the display device 41, or outputs sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b. In addition, the effect control device 300 receives a RAM initialization command and notifies the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 4 that the RAM has been initialized.
6. Notify by the board effect device 44.

Further, when the control unit detects that the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 is OFF after executing the process (steps S38 to S40) related to waiting for the end of setting change or waiting for the end of setting confirmation, step S55 is executed. Run. After prohibiting the interruption (step S55), the control unit transmits a notification end command to the effect control device 300 (step S
56).

Thereby, the effect control device 300 terminates the notification that the setting is being changed started by receiving the setting change command, or the setting confirmation that is started by receiving the setting confirmation command. .

Next, the control unit refers to the setting change mode flag to determine whether or not the setting change mode is in effect (step S57). If the control unit is in the setting change mode, step S5
Proceed to 2 to execute processing related to RAM initialization. On the other hand, if the control unit is not in the setting change mode, the control unit proceeds to step S58 and executes processing related to recovery from power failure.

In step S58, the control unit executes power failure recovery processing. The power failure recovery process saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized, refers to the special figure status to determine whether the special figure game is in the high probability, and determines whether the special figure game is in the high probability If , it includes a process of saving ON information in the high-probability notification flag area and saving ON-data of the high-probability notification LED in the segment area.

The areas to be initialized in the power failure recovery process are the power failure inspection area, the checksum area, the setting change mode flag, the setting confirmation mode flag, and the area related to error monitoring. In the power failure restoration process, the busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is determined. It is in an indeterminate state indicating that the Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared and set to an indeterminate state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined.

Next, the control unit transmits a power failure recovery command corresponding to the special game processing number to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S59), and proceeds to step S60. In addition, in step S59, model designation command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command,
A plurality of commands such as a probability information command, a probability setting value information command, a screen designation command, etc. are transmitted. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information about the number of presentations and high-probability number information is transmitted. In addition, the screen designation command means that the control state of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are both normal processing (during fluctuation, during jackpot (first special game state),
In the case of a small win (a state that is neither of the second special game states), it is a command to display a customer waiting demo screen, and in other cases, it is a command to display a recovery screen. is a command to

In step S60, the control unit performs a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit. After that, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on is extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (big hit design initial value random number, small hit design initial value random number, hit initial After saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) (value random number, winning design initial value random number) (step S61), interrupt is permitted (step S62).

Subsequently, the control unit performs an initial value random number update process (step S63) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers. This initial value random number update process is a process of updating (incrementing) each initial value random number by, for example, "+1". In this way, the gaming machine 10 can increase the randomness of the random numbers by continuing to update the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main processing.

Here, the control unit once prohibits the interrupt (step S64), executes the performance display editing process (step S65), and permits the interrupt after executing the performance display editing process (step S66). Performance display editing processing is processing related to base calculation and display. Since the processing load of the performance display editing process is relatively high, the control unit prohibits interrupts to derive processing results more quickly. As a result, the gaming machine 10 guarantees derivation of the processing result of the performance display editing processing until the gaming state is updated by the timer interrupt.

In step S67, the control unit determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. In addition, the control unit
Occurrence of a power failure can be determined by continuously detecting the power failure monitoring signal for a predetermined period of time. The control unit proceeds to step S41 if a power failure has occurred, and proceeds to step S if a power failure has not occurred.
Proceed to 63.

That is, the control unit repeatedly executes the processes from step S63 to step S67 as long as power failure does not occur. Specifically, when a power failure has not occurred, the control unit repeatedly performs initial value random number updating processing, performance display editing processing, and power failure monitoring signal checking (loop processing).

Then, interrupt is permitted (step S63) before the initial value random number update process (step S63).
66) Therefore, if a timer interrupt occurs during initial value random number update processing, the interrupt processing will be executed with priority, and interrupt processing will be put under pressure by waiting for the timer interrupt due to the initial value random number update processing. can be avoided.

Similarly, interrupts are prohibited (step S6) before the performance display editing process (step S65).
4) As a result, the performance display editing process is executed with priority over the timer interrupt,
It is possible to avoid pressure on the performance display editing process.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the overall game, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200,
At the time of power-on, the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and waits for the activation of the sub-control means. Means (game control device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

Also, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) , it is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data,
Initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit , and the operation state of the initialization operation unit is read before the standby time starts.

It should be noted that the game control device 100 has a function (first 1 initialization means, second initialization means), it is possible to realize optimum and efficient initialization processing according to the situation.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data,
Externally operable setting operation unit (setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 12
7), and a setting change means (game control device 100) for changing the setting value stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the setting operation unit to enable setting change, and a setting display unit ( The setting (setting value) can be confirmed by providing the probability setting value display device 136). In addition, the main control means (game control device 100), RAM after the elapse of the standby time
111C access is permitted.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) prohibits access to the RAM (RAM 111C) (step S47) and waits for the execution of all processes to stop during power failure standby processing (
a loop after step S47), and a RAM abnormality standby process (loop of steps S31 and S32) that waits for the execution of all processes to stop while permitting access to the RAM (RAM 111C) (step S17). making it executable.

Here, the power failure standby process and the RAM abnormality standby process will be described. The power failure standby process is a loop process that is executed after access to the RAM is prohibited in step S47 of the main process, and waits for the execution of all processes to stop. Also, since the power failure standby process is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in step S41 of the main process, the interrupt (timer interrupt) other than the NMI interrupt is prohibited. It should be noted that the standby process at the time of power failure is NMI
NMI interrupts can occur because interrupts cannot be disabled for interrupts. However, since the power failure waiting process is a process that is executed when a power failure occurs, there is little risk that an NMI interrupt will occur during the execution of this process. Also, the power failure standby process is a standby process that does not accompany an anomaly notification. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can allocate the power until the power shutdown to the power failure process. The gaming machine 10 inhibits access to the RAM during standby processing at the time of power failure, thereby reducing the risk that the stored contents of the RAM will change due to unstable voltage.

The RAM abnormality standby process is a loop process that is executed after access to the RAM (RWM) is permitted in step S17 of the main process, and waits for the execution of all processes to stop.
In addition, since the RAM abnormality standby process is executed after interrupts are prohibited in step S1 of the main process, interrupts other than NMI interrupts (timer interrupts) are prohibited. In addition, since the standby process at the time of power failure cannot prohibit interrupts for NMI interrupts, N
An MI interrupt can occur. Since the RAM abnormality standby process is a process of waiting for power shutdown, the risk of an NMI interrupt occurring during execution of this process is greater than that of the power failure standby process.
However, since access to the RAM is permitted even if an NMI interrupt occurs, the RAM abnormality standby process can store the return address in the RAM, and the risk of program runaway caused by the NMI interrupt is small. In addition, since the game machine 10 transmits the command of the main abnormality error notification to the effect control device 300 in step S30, the abnormality notification by the effect control device 300 can be performed in parallel during the execution of the RAM abnormality standby process. can be done. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can be expected to restart quickly.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing of the game control device 100 will be explained using FIG. Figure 1
1 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is performed during the period from when the interrupt is permitted until when the interrupt is prohibited (from step S38 to step S41, from step S38 to step S55, from step S66 to step S64, from step S66). to step S41)
This is the interrupt processing that occurs in The timer interrupt processing is processing executed by the CPU 111A.

Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and timer interrupt processing is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step S7
1). Switching to register bank 1 is equivalent to performing register save processing to move the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in main processing) to RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S72). In step S72, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different.

Next, an input process (step S73) of reading inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port is performed. In step S74, the control unit refers to the setting change mode flag and the setting confirmation mode flag to determine whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in progress. If the control unit is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the control unit proceeds to step S75, executes the setting change/confirmation process, and ends the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if the control unit is neither in the setting change mode nor in the setting confirmation mode, the process proceeds to step S76.

In step S76, the control section executes output processing for driving control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general electrical solenoid 37c) based on the output data set in various processing.

When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, signal processing and the like are not performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the game control device 1
00, and a second signal (fire permission signal) indicating the state of fire permission viewed from the payout control device 200 is also generated in the payout control device 200 and fired. Output to the control device. In other words, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device,
It is configured such that the game ball can be shot when both are allowed to be shot.

Next, the control unit sends commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 20.
Payout command transmission processing for outputting 0 (step S77), random number update processing 1 (step S7
8), Random number update process 2 (step S79) is executed. Here, the random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the jackpot pattern random number, the small hit pattern random number, the hit random number, and the hit pattern random number that are targets of the initial value random number update process. . Also, the random number update process 2 is
It is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of special figure 1 and special figure 2. The random number update process 1 or the random number update process 2 in addition to the random number update process 1 may stop the random number update during the setting change or change the update cycle.

Next, the control unit controls the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the normal gate switch 34a, the prize winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switch 38a, and the specific area switch 38.
Winning hole switch/state monitoring processing (step S80) is performed to monitor whether or not there is a normal signal input from e and monitor errors (whether the front frame or glass frame is open, etc.). In addition, a starting port switch monitoring process (step S81) for monitoring the winning of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in the starting winning opening 36 forming the first starting winning opening or the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) is extracted, and a game result preliminary determination is performed to determine in advance the game result based on the winning at the stage before the start of the special figure fluctuation display game.

Next, the control unit performs special figure 1 game processing (step S82) for performing processing related to the special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 game processing (step S83) for performing processing relating to the special figure 2 variation display game, general figure variation General-purpose game processing (step S
84).

Next, the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display the display of the special figure variation display game and various information related to the game (for example, the LE of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 of the collective display device 50
D) segment LED editing process (step S85) to drive to display the desired content
), the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 is checked to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (step S86), and the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 is checked to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. A board radio fraud monitoring process (step S87) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S88) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in an output buffer and a performance display device control process (step S89) are performed, and the timer interrupt process ends.

Here, in the first embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) It is automatically performed at the time of return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). It should be noted that depending on the CPU used, there are game machines that require a command to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Main processing]
Next, the main processing of the production control device 300 will be explained using FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of main processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started.
[Step D11] The controller prohibits interrupts.

[Step D<b>12 ] The controller initializes the CPU 311 .
[Step D<b>13 ] The controller initializes the VDP 312 .
[Step D14] The controller permits an interrupt.

[Step D15] The controller permits generation of display data. That is, the control unit
A display circuit (not shown) in the DP 312 is permitted to access the VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and generate display data.

[Step D16] The controller sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, the srand function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument given to the srand function, or use a value created based on the ID value of the CPU etc. so that it differs for each gaming machine. You may

[Step D17] The control unit uses the RWM of the effect control device 300 (for example, the RAM 322)
The initial value at the time of power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (for example, a flag area for production (storage area used as various flags described later in the control processing of the production control device 300)).

[Step D18] The controller clears the WDT (watchdog timer).
[Step D19] The control unit executes effect button input processing. The effect button input process is a process for performing editing when the effect button 25 (effect button switch 25a) is operated when enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at high speed, the control unit may perform processing for sensing the input of the effect button within the effect button input process, or may be performed within a short cycle timer interrupt (not shown). good.

[Step D20] The control section executes hall/player setting mode processing. Hall/player setting mode processing includes setting the changeable range of the brightness of the LEDs and the display device 41, volume, etc.,
This is a process of accepting an operation such as changing the brightness of the LED or the display device 41 and the sound volume by the player.

[Step D21] The control unit executes random number update processing. For example, the random number update process is performed by r
This is a process of updating the pseudo-random numbers at least once in each control cycle of the main process using an and function. Since the rand function generates a random number based on the designated generation sequence each time recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain the random number simply by executing the rand function. A counter that increments by "1" like the main board (game control device 100) may be used as the random number.

[Step D22] The controller executes a received command check process. The received command check process is a process of analyzing commands received from the game control device 100 in units of a predetermined number.

[Step D23] The control unit executes effect display editing processing. The effect display editing process is performed by V
This is processing for setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the DP 312 about the content of drawing on the display device 41 . For example, the control unit sets commands in a table in the effect display editing process.

[Step D24] The control unit executes drawing command preparation end setting. The drawing command preparation end setting is a process of setting that preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing process is completed.

[Step D25] The controller determines whether or not it is time to switch frames. If it is time to switch frames, the process proceeds to step D26. If it is time to switch frames, it waits for the time to switch frames. Here, the frame switching timing is determined by the V blank interrupt (
It is timing that arrives at a time interval corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 second≈33.333 ms) created based on the cycle (for example, 1/60 second) of V sync interrupt). Note that the V blank interrupt occurs each time the VDP 312 completes one scan of the entire screen for drawing. The period of generation of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 second as described above. In this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and the V blank interrupt occurs twice, the frame is switched, and the cycle of the frame switching timing is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 second). (For example, 1/30 sec ≈ 33.33 ms
)become. However, the frame switching timing is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be changed arbitrarily. Frame switching may be performed periodically.

By the frame switching timing determination process, subsequent processes (steps D26 to D30 and subsequent steps D18 to D24) are executed at the frame switching timing for each processing cycle. Note that the time management that needs to be synchronized with the content of the presentation is performed in units of frames (that is, in units of processing cycles). If the processing period is 1/30 second, for example, 3 frames will be 100 ms. This is the same as that the main board (game control device) manages the time value in units of 4ms of the timer interrupt period.

[Step D26] The controller controls VDP3 according to the command set in step D23.
12 is instructed to draw the screen. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table to instruct the VDP 312 to draw the screen.

[Step D27] The controller executes sound control processing. The sound control processing is processing related to volume control of sounds from the speakers (the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The controller executes decoration control processing. The decoration control process is a process for controlling various LEDs of the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the like.
[Step D29] The controller executes a movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process of controlling a movable body (for example, board effect device 44) including various motors and SOL (solenoid).

[Step D30] The control section executes a firing information control process. The launch information control process sets the launch-related information based on the launch status flag, and the special figure rotation state (the number of special figure fluctuations per game for a predetermined amount (that is, a predetermined number of rental balls)). mode correction.

[Step D31] The control unit executes information disclosure processing. The information disclosure process is a process of disclosing performance information regarding game performance to the player.
After executing step D31, the control unit returns to step D18, and thereafter returns to step D1.
8 to step D31 are repeatedly executed. That is, step D18 to step D
31 is a loop process (
Sometimes referred to as main loop processing).

Note that the control unit executes the processing of steps D27 to D29 in the main loop processing in order to match the screen effects. A signal for driving control, etc.) is actually output to the port in a short cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there are cases in which signals, etc., are not output by timer interrupts, just by giving instructions through serial communication or the like.

Next, the display executed by the effect control device 300 during the game of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 13 . FIG. 13 is a diagram (Part 1) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the first embodiment. Here, the display screen (sometimes simply referred to as "screen") is a screen consisting of one or more images displayed in the display area of the display device 41, and in principle different codes are used for different display contents. is attached.

A display screen 500 shown in FIG. 13(1) is a display screen in which symbols are stopped. It is used for period stop display. The display screen 500 includes a large pattern group 501, a small pattern group 502, a special figure 1 reserved number display 503, a special figure 2 reserved number display 504, and a reserved display 505.
, and a pending digestion display 506 are displayed.

The large pattern group 501 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, large pattern group 5
01 is displayed in a large size by setting a variable display area in the approximate center of the display device 41 . The large symbol group 501 includes left symbols, middle symbols and right symbols.

In the display screen 500, the left symbol indicates that the symbol is stopped at "3", and the middle symbol indicates that
It shows that the symbol is stopped at "5", and the right symbol shows that the symbol is stopped at "7". That is, the large symbol group 501 on the display screen 500 indicates that the special symbol variation display game is in a stopped state (symbols are stopped).

The small symbol group 502 is in charge of notifying the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small pattern group 502 is displayed in a small size on the periphery of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display performance by the large pattern group 501 . The small pattern group 502 is
It includes a left symbol, a middle symbol and a right symbol. On the display screen 500, the left, medium and right symbols that constitute the small symbol group 502 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in a stopped state.

In general, the large pattern group 501 is displayed larger than the small pattern group 502, has a high degree of freedom in display position, and can be greatly changed in its display mode. On the contrary, the small pattern group 502 is displayed smaller than the large pattern group 501, and has a low degree of freedom of display position (for example, fixed position).

The special figure 1 reserved number display 503 displays the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game. On the display screen 500, the special figure 1 reserved number display 503 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game is "3".
The special figure 2 reserved number display 504 displays the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game. In the display screen 500, the special figure 2 reserved number display 504 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game is "0".

Suspension display 505 shows how the number of suspension icons 507 corresponding to the number of suspensions of the special figure 1 game is displayed corresponding to the current gaming state (for example, normal gaming state). hold icon 5
07 has, for example, a spherical shape, and the pending icon 507 can also be displayed with movement by animation (for example, deformation, color change, vertical movement, etc.). Further, the pending consumption display 506 shows how the pending consumption icon 508 corresponding to the pending consumption of the special figure game is displayed. Pending digestion icon 508 is, for example, a spherical shape, and pending digestion icon 50
8 can also produce a display with movement by animation (for example, deformation, color change, vertical movement, etc.).

For example, as shown in the display screen 500, when the special figure 1 pending number display 503 displays "3" and the special figure 2 pending number display 504 displays "0", the pending display 505 shows three pending storage displays indicates that the number of reserved memories is "3". It should be noted that the number of reservations or the number of reservations means the number of starting memories in which the special figure variation display game has not been executed.

Suspension display 505, depending on its display mode (suspension storage display displayed in suspension display 505),
The number of reserved memories of the special figure fluctuation display game can be specified, and the degree of expectation for the game result for each reserved memory can be notified.

The pending digestion display 506 can indicate whether or not the special figure variable display game is in a variable display state and inform the degree of expectation for the game result by its display mode. In the display screen 500, the pending digestion display 506 has a blank (blank) inside the frame to indicate that the special figure variation display game is in a stopped state. After that, the gaming machine 10 starts the variable display.

It should be noted that the reservation display 505, according to the gaming state, the reservation number of either the special figure 1 game or the reservation number of the special figure 2 game was displayed by the reservation icon 507, but the special figure 1
The total pending number of the game pending number and the special figure 2 game pending number may be displayed by the pending icon 507 .

A display screen 510 shown in FIG. 13(2) is a display screen after the start of the variable display. A display screen 510 is a screen subsequent to the display screen 500 and shows a screen during variable display (during three-symbol variation). On the display screen 510, the left, medium and right symbols of the large symbol group 501 are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure fluctuation display game is being variably displayed. Also, on the display screen 510, the left pattern, the medium pattern, and the right pattern of the small pattern group 502 are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure fluctuation display game is being fluctuated.

On the display screen 510, the special figure 1 reserved number display 503 indicates that the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game is "2".
, the special figure 2 reserved number display 504 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game is "0", and the reserved display 505 is a game state that guides the reserved number of the special figure 1 game , indicating that the reserved memory number of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 game) is "2". In addition, on the display screen 510, a pending digestion display 506 displays a pending memory display that is being digested, indicating that the special figure variation display game is in the process of variation display.

The display screen 500 and the display screen 510 may include effect display elements (not shown) such as background display, character display, and character display. It may be possible.

Here, the decorative design (decorative design) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of the decorative design of the first embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 comprises decorative symbols (large symbol group), which will be described later, with left symbols, right symbols, and middle symbols, and stops the left symbols, right symbols, and middle symbols in the order of symbol variation. The gaming machine 10 can display a decorative pattern A and a decorative pattern B as decorative patterns.

For example, the gaming machine 10 can use the decorative pattern A for the left pattern and the right pattern that can form a pattern combination that will result in a ready-to-win situation, and use the decorative pattern B for the middle pattern that will form a pattern combination that will result in a big win after the ready-to-win condition is formed. can. Alternatively, the gaming machine 10 can use the decorative symbol A in the normal game state and the decorative symbol B in the high-probability game state or electric sapo game state.

Decorative pattern A includes patterns 521, 522, 523, 524, 525, 526, and 527. The patterns 521, 522, 523, 524, 525, 526, and 527 are distinguishable from other patterns by different display modes. The decorative pattern A includes two or more pattern constituent elements, at least one of which has distinguishability from other patterns. The decorative design A is a decorative design that includes one character (number) and displays the character as a distinctive design element.

The pattern 521 is a pattern that displays the number "1". The pattern 521 includes a background portion 521d and a number portion 521n. The background portion 521d has a rectangular outer shape and a distinctive design (for example, a white circular shape). The number part 521n has identifiability as a design.

A pattern 522 is a pattern that displays the number "2". The pattern 522 includes a background portion 522d and a number portion 522n. The background portion 522d has a rectangular outer shape and a distinctive design (for example, a white cross). The number part 522n has identifiability as a design.

The pattern 523 is a pattern that displays the number "3". The pattern 523 includes a background portion 523d and a number portion 523n. The background portion 523d has a rectangular outer shape and a distinctive design (for example, a white square shape). The number part 523n has identifiability as a design.

A pattern 524 is a pattern that displays the number "4". The pattern 524 includes a background portion 524d and a number portion 524n. The background portion 524d has a rectangular outer shape and a distinctive design (for example, a white double circle). The number part 524n has identifiability as a design.

The pattern 525 is a pattern that displays the number "5". The pattern 525 includes a background portion 525d and a number portion 525n. The background portion 525d has a rectangular outer shape and a distinctive design (for example, a white triangular shape). The number part 525n has identifiability as a design.

A design 526 is a design that displays the number "6". The pattern 526 includes a background portion 526d and a number portion 526n. The background portion 526d has a rectangular outer shape and a distinctive design (for example, a white rhombus). The number part 526n has identifiability as a design.

The pattern 527 is a pattern that displays the number "7". The pattern 527 includes a background portion 527d and a number portion 527n. The background portion 527d has a rectangular outer shape and a distinctive design (for example, a white star shape). The number part 527n has identifiability as a design.

The decorative pattern B includes patterns 531, 532, 533, 534, 535, 536, and 537. The patterns 531, 532, 533, 534, 535, 536, and 537 are distinguishable from other patterns by different display modes. The decorative design B includes one design component, and the one design component has a discriminating power that allows it to be distinguished from other designs. The decorative design B is a decorative design that includes one character (number) and displays the character as a design constituent element having recognizability.

The pattern 531 is a pattern that displays the number "1". The pattern 532 is a pattern that displays the number "2". The pattern 533 is a pattern that displays the number "3". The pattern 534 is a number "
4" is displayed. The pattern 535 is a pattern that displays the number "5". Design 53
6 is a pattern that displays the number "6". The pattern 537 is a pattern that displays the number "7".

Next, a variable display example using the decorative pattern A and a variable display example using the decorative pattern B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a diagram (
2).

A display screen 512 shown in FIG. 15(1) shows how the decorative symbol A is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 512, the large pattern group 501 swings the pattern 523 (left), the pattern 525 (middle), and the pattern 527 (right) to display the left pattern "3", the middle pattern "5", and the right pattern "7". ” is displayed as a temporary stop.

On the display screen 512, the left, medium and right symbols of the small symbol group 502 are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure fluctuation display game is being fluctuated. Also, on the display screen 512, the special figure 1 reserved number display 503 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game is "2", and the special figure 2 reserved number display 504 indicates the reserved memory of the special figure 2 game. Indicates that the number is "0" and a pending indication 50
5 is a game state that guides the reserved number of the special figure 1 game, and indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 game) is "2". In addition, on the display screen 512, a pending digestion display 506 displays a pending memory display that is being digested, indicating that the special figure variation display game is in the process of variation display.

A display screen 514 shown in FIG. 15(2) shows a state in which the decorative symbol B is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 514, the large pattern group 501 swings the pattern 533 (left), the pattern 535 (middle), and the pattern 537 (right) to display the left pattern "3," the middle pattern "5," and the right pattern "7." ” is displayed as a temporary stop.

On the display screen 514, the left, medium and right symbols of the small symbol group 502 are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure fluctuation display game is in the process of fluctuating display. Also, on the display screen 514, the special figure 1 reserved number display 503 indicates that the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game is "0", and the special figure 2 reserved number display 504 indicates the reserved memory of the special figure 2 game. The pending display 50 indicates that the number is "2"
5 is a game state that guides the reserved number of the special figure 2 game, and indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2 game) is "2". Also, on the display screen 514, the pending digestion display 506 displays a pending memory display that is being digested, indicating that the special figure variation display game is being displayed in variation.

Thus, the gaming machine 10 can perform a temporary stop display using the decorative symbol A and a temporary stop display using the decorative symbol B. Next, a more detailed display mode of the decorative symbols A and B during temporary stop display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop display using decorative symbols according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 16(1) shows the temporary stop display mode of the symbol 527 as an example of the decorative symbol A during the temporary stop display. The temporary stop display mode of the pattern 527 periodically repeats (a), (b), (c), and (d).

In the pattern 527 during the temporary stop display, the background portion 527d is fixed, and the number portion 527n having distinguishability as the pattern 527 swings in the horizontal direction. Note that the background portion 527d is not limited to a still image, and may be an image that displays an animation accompanied by movement.

As a result, the game machine 10 emphasizes the swinging of the number portion by comparison with the background portion, and realizes a temporary stop display that is easy for the player to grasp. Note that the game machine 10 emphasizes the contour display of the number part in order to facilitate the comparison between the background part and the number part.

FIG. 16(2) shows a temporary stop display mode of the symbol 537 as an example of the decorative symbol B during the temporary stop display. The temporary stop display mode of the pattern 537 periodically repeats (a), (b), (c), and (d).

The pattern 537 during temporary stop display swings the entire pattern 537 in the horizontal direction (first temporary stop operation).
while rotating the vertical axis (second temporary stop operation) within a predetermined angle range. That is, the pattern 537
is a combination of two types of temporary stop operations.

As a result, the game machine 10 emphasizes the temporary stop motion of the entire pattern, and allows the player to easily grasp the temporary stop state while suppressing obstruction of the game performance. In addition, the game machine 10 makes the outline display of the symbol ambiguous (non-emphasized) in order to emphasize the temporary stop motion of the entire symbol.

Although the temporary stop display mode of the pattern 537 is a combination of two types of temporary stop operations, a combination of three types of temporary stop operations including deformation operations, etc., or a combination of four or more types of temporary stop operations is also possible. good.

In addition, the entire pattern (for example, pattern 537) or the pattern component (for example, number part 5
27n) is not limited to rocking motion in a narrow sense, but includes periodic motion that can be perceived as temporary stop motion. For example, vertical axis rotation performed within a predetermined angle range, deformation motion repeating a predetermined pattern, and the like are included in rocking motion in the temporary stop motion.

In addition, the temporary stop operation of the symbol 527 during the temporary stop display is the temporary stop operation in which the number portion 527n swings in the horizontal direction, but there are two types of temporary stop operation of the symbol 537 during the temporary stop display. It may be a temporary stop motion in which the vertical axis rotates within a predetermined angle range, which is one of the stop motions.

Further, the decorative pattern B (for example, the pattern 537) being temporarily stopped is rotated in the vertical axis within a predetermined angle range (second However, it is not limited to this as long as it includes a different form of the temporary stop operation from the pattern component (for example, the number portion 527n) of the decorative pattern A (for example, the pattern 527) during the temporary stop display.
For example, when the temporary stop motion of the symbol 527 during the temporary stop display is a temporary stop motion of rocking the number portion 527n in the horizontal direction, the temporary stop motion of the symbol 537 during the temporary stop display rocks in the horizontal direction. It is acceptable if it includes a temporary stop motion in which the vertical axis rotates within a range of a predetermined angle, which is different from the temporary stop motion. At this time, the temporary stop motion of the pattern 537 during the temporary stop display may include only the temporary stop motion of rotating the vertical axis within a predetermined angle range, or additionally the temporary stop motion of rocking in the horizontal direction. may be included, or other temporary stop operations may be included. Even in this way, the gaming machine 10 clearly distinguishes between the temporary stop operation of the decorative symbol A and the temporary stop operation of the decorative symbol B, and even if the modes of the decorative symbols are diverse, the game machine 10 can easily understand the temporary stop operation for the player. Realize the stop operation.

Further, the game machine 10 emphasizes the outline display of the number part of the decorative symbol A during the temporary stop display and obscures the outline display of the decorative symbol B during the temporary stop display. Decorative pattern A
This can be realized by making the contour display of the numeral portion of (1) thicker than the contour display of the decorative pattern B during temporary stop display. In addition, emphasis or non-emphasis of the outline display is not limited to the thickness of the outline display, but may be realized by saturation or brightness, and may be achieved by combining the thickness of the outline display with saturation or brightness. There may be. Also, the thickness of the outline display is not limited to the absolute thickness, and the pattern width (
Alternatively, it may be defined by a ratio of the width of the numeric part).

Regarding the decorative pattern A during the temporary stop display, the background portion is fixed and the number portion swings in the horizontal direction, but the background portion may swing. Next, the decorative pattern A during the temporary stop display
A swinging example of the background portion of is described with reference to FIG. 17 . FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of swinging of the background portion of the decorative pattern A during temporary stop display according to the first embodiment. Note that the rocking motion described below is not limited to a one-way rocking motion, and may be axial rotation, deformation, or the like.

A pattern 527 shown in FIG.
7b and a symbol portion 527s having identifiability as the design 527, the background portion 527
Construct d. A pattern 527 shown in FIG. 17(1) includes a base portion 527b and a symbol portion 527.
s and the numeral portion 527n are integrally rocked in the horizontal direction with the same period, phase, and displacement.

The pattern 527 shown in FIG. 17(2) is formed by fixing the base portion 527b and forming the symbol portion 527s.
, the number portion 527n swings in the horizontal direction. That is, the pattern 527 shown in FIG. 17(2) is
The symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n oscillate in the horizontal direction with the same period, phase, and displacement.
Note that the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n may not be limited to having the same period, the same phase, and the same displacement, while both swinging in the horizontal direction. For example, the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n may both oscillate in the horizontal direction, but may have different periods, different phases, or different amounts of displacement. Also, the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n may differ in two or more of the period, phase, and displacement. Also, the base portion 527b is not limited to a still image, and may display an animation accompanied by movement. Also, the base portion 527b may swing independently of the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n.

The pattern 527 shown in FIG. 17(3) is formed by fixing the base portion 527b and forming the symbol portion 527s.
swings in the vertical direction, and the number portion 527n swings in the horizontal direction. That is, in the design 527 shown in FIG. 17(3), the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n swing in different manners. The symbol part 527s and the number part 527n may have the same period and the same phase, or may have different periods and different phases, while oscillating in different modes. Also, the base portion 527b
is not limited to a still image, and may display an animation accompanied by movement.
Also, the base portion 527b may swing independently of the symbol portion 527s and the number portion 527n.

Here, the temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern A will be illustrated with reference to FIG. 18 . FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop mode of the decorative symbol A of the first embodiment. In the temporary stop mode of the decorative symbol A shown in FIG.
The amount of displacement is assumed to be 10% of the pattern width (for example, 80 pixels when the pattern width is 800 pixels). Further, in the decorative pattern A temporary stop mode shown in FIG. 18(1), the base portion and the symbol portion are fixed. Although the amount of displacement of the number portion was 10% of the pattern width, the amount of displacement of the number portion was 10% of the width of the number portion (for example, 20 pixels when the width of the number portion was 200 pixels). It may be

Another example of the temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern A shown in FIG.
0% (for example, 80 pixels when the pattern width is 800 pixels).

Another example of the temporary stop mode of the decorative symbol A shown in FIG. 80 pixels for 800 pixels). Also, the decorative pattern A shown in FIG. 18(3)
Another example of the temporary stop mode is that the displacement direction of the base portion and the symbol portion is the same horizontal direction as the number portion, the displacement cycle is 1000 ms different from the number portion (larger than the number portion), and the displacement amount is different from the number portion (number 15% (for example, 120 pixels when the pattern width is 800 pixels) to the pattern width (larger than the part).

In another example of the temporary stop mode of the decorative symbol A shown in FIG. 80 pixels for 800 pixels). Also, the decorative pattern A shown in FIG. 18(4)
Another example of the temporary stop mode is that the displacement direction of the base portion is the same as the number portion in the left and right direction, the displacement period is 1000 ms different from the number portion (larger than the number portion), and the displacement amount is different from the number portion (larger than the number portion). ) 15% of the pattern width (for example, 1 when the pattern width is 800 pixels)
20 pixels). Further, another example of the decorative pattern A temporary stop mode shown in FIG. The amount of displacement is assumed to be 10% with respect to the same pattern width as the number portion.

Next, emphasis display and ambiguous (non-emphasis) display of the outline of the pattern will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing emphasized display and ambiguous (non-emphasized) display of the outline of the pattern according to the first embodiment.

Fig. 19(1) shows the pattern widths and outlines of the decorative patterns A and B, and Fig. 19(2) shows a comparison of the outline thicknesses of the decorative patterns A and B. The decorative pattern A has a pattern width of w1, a number portion width of w2 (<w1), and an outline width (thickness) of the number portion of w3 (<w2).
The decorative pattern B has a pattern width of w4 and an outline width (thickness) of the pattern of w5 (<w4).

The game machine 10 emphasizes the contour display of the number part of the decorative pattern A by making the width w3 of the contour line of the number part of the decorative pattern A larger than the width w5 of the contour line of the pattern of the decorative pattern B. The player can be made to feel that the contour display of the pattern B is ambiguous.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may realize emphasis and non-emphasis of the outline display by the ratio of the width of the symbol and the thickness of the outline (outline ratio). For example, the gaming machine 10 emphasizes the contour display of the number part of the decorative pattern A by making the contour ratio w3/w2 of the decorative pattern A larger than the contour ratio w5/w4 of the decorative pattern B, thereby enhancing the decoration. The player can be made to feel that the contour display of the pattern B is ambiguous.

Emphasizing the outline display of the number part of the decorative design A and de-emphasizing the outline display of the design of the decorative design B are
It may be always fixed, or it may be switchable according to the variable display state. Next, switching of the emphasized state of outline display according to the variable display state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of the timing of highlighting and ambiguous (non-emphasizing) display of the outline of the pattern according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 20(1) shows a comparison of the thickness of the contour display of the number portion of the decorative pattern A and the thickness of the contour display of the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B according to the variable display state. During variable display (non-temporary stop state), during variable display (temporary stop state), and during stop display, the number part of decorative pattern A is changed to decorative pattern B.
The contour display of the whole pattern of the decorative pattern B is emphasized compared to the whole pattern of B, and the contour display of the whole pattern of the decorative pattern B is made ambiguous (non-emphasized) compared to the number part of the decorative pattern A.

FIG. 20(2) shows another example of comparison of the thickness of the contour display of the number portion of the decorative pattern A and the thickness of the contour display of the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B according to the variable display state. During fluctuating display (non-temporary stop state)
During the variable display (temporary stop state), the outline display of the number part of the decorative design A is emphasized compared to the entire design of the decorative design B, and the entire design of the decorative design B is similar to the number part of the decorative design A. The outline representation is blurred (de-emphasized) in comparison. Further, during the stop display, the contour display of the number part of the decorative pattern A is not emphasized as compared with the whole pattern of the decorative pattern B, and the whole pattern of the decorative pattern B is compared with the number part of the decorative pattern A. The contour display is not obscured (de-emphasized). In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform appropriate highlighting or non-emphasis display according to the variable display state by switching the highlighting state of the outline display according to the variable display state. In addition, the gaming machine 10
By switching the emphasized state of the contour display according to the variable display state, the player can easily perceive the change in the emphasized state of the contour display. In addition, the game machine 10 makes it easy to grasp the temporary stop state while suppressing obstruction of the game performance, and can improve the visibility during the stop display.

FIG. 20(3) shows another example of comparison of the thickness of the contour display of the number portion of the decorative pattern A and the thickness of the contour display of the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B according to the variable display state. During the variable display (temporary stop state), the contour display of the number part of the decorative pattern A is emphasized compared to the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B,
The overall design of the decorative design B is made obscure (non-emphasized) in outline display as compared with the number part of the decorative design A. - 特許庁Further, during the variable display (non-temporary stop state) and during the stop display, the outline display of the number part of the decorative design A is not emphasized as compared with the entire design of the decorative design B, and the entire design of the decorative design B is The contour display is not made ambiguous (de-emphasized) as compared with the number part of the decorative pattern A. In this way, the game machine 10 emphasizes the contour display only during the variable display (temporary stop state), thereby making it possible to easily grasp the temporary stop state while suppressing obstacles to the game performance. .

Next, as a modification of the first embodiment, the outline display of the number part of the decorative pattern A is deemphasized,
A game machine 10 emphasizing the outline display of the decorative pattern B will be described. Such a gaming machine 10 can strongly appeal the temporary stop action of the decorative symbol B to the player.
In addition, such a game machine 10 prevents the number part of the decorative pattern A from being emphasized more than the base part and the symbol part, and the number part of the decorative pattern A has a sense of unity with the base part and the symbol part. The stop action can be more appealing to the player.

The non-emphasis of the outline display of the number part of the decorative design A and the emphasis of the outline display of the design of the decorative design B are
It may be always fixed, or it may be switchable according to the variable display state. Next, switching of the emphasized state of outline display according to the variable display state will be described with reference to FIG. 21 . FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of the timing of emphasized display and ambiguous (non-emphasized) display of the outline of the pattern according to the modification of the first embodiment.

FIG. 21(1) shows a comparison of the thickness of the contour display of the number portion of the decorative pattern A and the thickness of the contour display of the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B according to the variable display state. During variable display (non-temporary stop state), during variable display (temporary stop state), and during stop display, the number part of decorative pattern A is changed to decorative pattern B.
The contour display of the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B is made ambiguous (non-emphasized) compared to the whole pattern of B, and the contour display of the whole pattern of the decorative pattern B is emphasized compared to the number part of the decorative pattern A.

FIG. 21(2) shows another example of comparison between the thickness of the contour display of the number portion of the decorative pattern A and the thickness of the contour display of the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B according to the variable display state. During fluctuating display (non-temporary stop state)
During the variable display (temporary stop state), the outline display of the number part of the decorative design A is made ambiguous (non-emphasized) compared to the entire design of the decorative design B, and the entire design of the decorative design B is the decorative design. The contour display is emphasized compared to the number part of A. Further, during the stop display, the contour display of the number portion of the decorative design A is not made ambiguous (non-emphasized) compared to the entire design of the decorative design B, and the entire design of the decorative design B is the number of the decorative design A. The contour display is not emphasized compared to the part. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform appropriate highlighting or non-emphasis display according to the variable display state by switching the highlighting state of the outline display according to the variable display state. In addition, the gaming machine 10
By switching the emphasized state of the contour display according to the variable display state, the player can easily perceive the change in the emphasized state of the contour display. In addition, the game machine 10 makes it easy to grasp the temporary stop state while suppressing obstruction of the game performance, and can improve the visibility during the stop display.

FIG. 21(3) shows another example of comparison of the thickness of the contour display of the number part of the decorative pattern A and the thickness of the contour display of the entire pattern of the decorative pattern B according to the variable display state. During the variable display (temporary stop state), the contour display of the number part of the decorative pattern A is made ambiguous (non-emphasized) compared to the overall pattern of the decorative pattern B, and the overall pattern of the decorative pattern B is the same as that of the decorative pattern A. The contour display is emphasized compared to the numerical portion of the . Further, during variable display (non-temporary stop state) and during stop display, the outline display of the number part of the decorative design A is not made ambiguous (de-emphasized) compared to the entire design of the decorative design B, and the decorative design B , the contour display is not emphasized as compared with the number part of the decorative pattern A. In this way, the game machine 10 emphasizes the contour display only during the variable display (temporary stop state), thereby making it possible to easily grasp the temporary stop state while suppressing obstacles to the game performance. .

Here, FIG. 22 shows a more detailed modification of the display mode of the decorative patterns A and B during temporary stop display.
will be used to explain. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of temporary stop display using decorative symbols according to a modification of the first embodiment.

FIG. 22(1) shows a temporary stop display mode of the symbol 527 as an example of the decorative symbol A during the temporary stop display. The temporary stop display mode of the pattern 527 periodically repeats (a), (b), (c), and (d).

The pattern 527 during the temporary stop display has a background portion 527d fixed, and the number portion 527n that is identifiable as the pattern 527 swings in the horizontal direction (first temporary stop operation), and expands and contracts in the vertical direction ( second temporary stop operation). That is, the temporary stop display mode of the pattern 527 is a combination of two types of temporary stop actions in the number portion. Note that the background portion 527d is not limited to a still image, and may be an image that displays an animation accompanied by movement.

As a result, the game machine 10 emphasizes the temporary stop operation of the number part, and allows the player to easily grasp the temporary stop state while suppressing the hindrance to the game performance. In addition, the gaming machine 10
In order to emphasize the temporary stop operation of the number part, the contour display of the number part is made ambiguous (non-emphasized).

The temporary stop display mode of the pattern 527 is a combination of two types of temporary stop actions in the number part, but a combination of three types of temporary stop actions with deformation actions etc., or a combination of four or more types of temporary stop actions. A combination may be used.

FIG. 22(2) shows a temporary stop display mode of the symbol 537 as an example of the decorative symbol B during the temporary stop display. The temporary stop display mode of the pattern 537 periodically repeats (a), (b), (c), and (d). The symbol 537 during temporary stop display swings the entire symbol 537 in the vertical direction. As a result, the game machine 10 emphasizes the swinging of the entire pattern by emphasizing the outline display of the entire pattern, thereby realizing a temporary stop display that is easy for the player to grasp.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 vaguely (non-emphasizes) the contour display of the number part of the decorative pattern A during temporary stop display.
The contour display of the decorative design B during temporary stop display is emphasized, but the contour display of the decorative design B during temporary stop display is emphasized from the contour display of the number part of decorative design A during temporary stop display. This can be achieved by making it thicker.

In addition, emphasis or non-emphasis of the outline display is not limited to the thickness of the outline display, but may be realized by saturation or brightness, and may be achieved by combining the thickness of the outline display with saturation or brightness. There may be. Further, the thickness of the outline display is not limited to the absolute thickness, and may be defined by the ratio of the pattern width (or the width of the number portion). In addition, emphasis and non-emphasis of the outline display may be achieved by thickening the outline display of one of the decorative patterns to be compared and thinning the other, or by adjusting the thickness of the outline display of one of the decorative patterns to be compared. may be left unchanged and only the other is changed. Further, the enhancement of the outline display may be performed by setting the outline display to an object that originally does not have the outline display. Further, the non-emphasis of the contour display may be performed by omitting the contour display originally set.

Regarding the decorative pattern A during the temporary stop display, the background portion is fixed and the number portion swings in the horizontal direction, but the background portion may swing. Emphasis of the contour display of the number part of the decorative pattern A and non-emphasis of the contour display of the pattern of the decorative pattern B may be always fixed, but can be switched according to the variable display state. Also in the modified example, it is possible to switch the emphasized state of the contour display described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21 .

Next, the message effects in the variable display game will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 2
3 is a diagram showing an example of a message display effect of the first embodiment. The gaming machine 10 controls the thickness of the outline display portion of the message display in the message presentation in the variable display game, thereby enhancing the player's perceptive effect of the message.

A display screen 600 shown in FIG. 23(1) shows how the large symbol group 501 is in the ready-to-win state. In the large pattern group 501 on the display screen 590, the large pattern (left) and the large pattern (right) are patterns "3".
is rocked to display a temporary stop, and the large pattern (middle) is variably displayed. Note that the display screen 59
0 indicates that the left pattern, middle pattern and right pattern of the small pattern group 502 are fluctuating, and that the special figure fluctuation display game is in the process of fluctuating display.

In addition, the display screen 590 shows a state in which a message display effect is being executed in relation to the fact that the large symbol group 501 is in the ready-to-win state. The display screen 590 displays a message display effect 593 . The message display rendering 593 includes a background portion 594 and a message portion 595 . A background portion 594 is a display serving as a background of the message portion 595, and facilitates distinction from other display portions. The background portion 594 has, for example, a balloon shape, and has a different color or the like from the other display portions to facilitate distinction between the background portion 594 and the other display portions. The message section 595 displays a desired message (for example, "Chance!") to make the player feel a predetermined sense of expectation.

A display screen 592 shown in FIG. 23B is a display screen following the display screen 590 . The message display effect 593 is a display that dynamically changes, and the background portion 5 is displayed as compared to the display screen 590 .
The position and size of 94 are the same. On the other hand, the message display rendering 593 enlarges and displays the message portion 595 as compared with the display screen 590 . The message display rendering 593 thickens the contour display of the message portion 595 as the message portion 595 is enlarged. That is, the message display effect 593 enhances the player's perceptive effect of the message by fixing the position and size of the background portion 594 and enlarging and displaying the message portion 595 . In addition, the message display effect 593 increases the thickness of the outline display of the message portion 595 while fixing the thickness of the outline display of the background portion 594, thereby further enhancing the player's perceptive effect of the message. . Note that the enlargement of the thickness of the outline display of the message portion 595 may be the same as the enlargement ratio in the enlarged display of the message portion 595. The perceptive effect of the message can be further enhanced. Although the enlargement of the thickness of the outline display of the message part 595 has been described as a case where it is made larger than the enlargement ratio in the enlarged display of the message part 595, it is not limited to this, and is made smaller than the enlargement ratio in the enlarged display of the message part 595. By doing so, the player may be alerted and the effect of the message may be enhanced.

Regarding the switching of the outline display of the gaming machine 10 , the large symbol group 501 and the message display effect 593 have been described, but the gaming machine 10 may switch the outline display of the small symbol group 502 . Here, switching of outline display of the small pattern group 502 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of outline display of the small pattern group according to the first embodiment.

First, the normal display position (during stop display) of the small pattern (any one of the small pattern group 502)
is shown in FIG. 24(1). The small pattern group 502 includes a left pattern, a middle pattern, and a right pattern, all of which are similarly variable display. The variable display of the small symbols is a switching variation in which the symbols are sequentially switched according to the pattern arrangement. Since the small pattern viewed from the display area 540 has no offset setting, it is always displayed at the normal display position where the entire pattern can be observed. For example, figure 5
44 is in the normal display position. The pattern 544 during the static display is displayed with the contour of the entire pattern emphasized compared to the pattern 544 during the variable display.

It should be noted that the switching fluctuation of the small pattern is performed in frame units (display switching time units) in the display device 41.
It is expressed by rewriting the small pattern. Here, the pattern display for each frame is shown in FIG. 24(2).

For example, when the small pattern 543 (symbol "3") is displayed in the display area 540 at the normal display position in one frame, the pattern 544 (symbol "4") is displayed in the display area 540 in the normal display position in the next frame. to display. Similarly, for the small pattern, a pattern 545 (symbol "5") is displayed in the display area 540 at the normal display position in the next frame. Patterns 543 and 54 at the normal display position
4 and 545, the entire pattern can be observed from the display area 511 and has sufficient discrimination power. The pattern 544 during variable display is displayed with the outline of the entire pattern emphasized compared to the pattern 544 during stop display. The same applies to other small symbols including the symbols 543 and 545. FIG.

In this way, the variable display of the small symbol group 502 cyclically switches the symbols to "3", "4", "5", . . . every frame time (33.3 ms). Therefore, small pattern group 5
In the variable display of 02, the display time per symbol is 33.3 ms, and the display time per symbol at the normal display position is 33.3 ms. In this way, the variable display of the small symbol group 502 is always displayed at the normal display position even during the variable display. It assists in making it easy to perceive the changing display of the group 502 . Note that the ambiguous display during the variable display of the small pattern group 502 is limited to outlines, and other portions are displayed in the same manner as during the stop display, thereby ensuring a certain degree of discernment of the entire pattern.

The gaming machine 10 (including modifications) of the first embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 is a display means (for example, display a device 41), a first identification component (for example, a number (numeral portion 527n)) having an identification ability to specify a pattern by a character attribute, and a second identification having an identification ability to specify a pattern by a non-character attribute. A first type pattern (for example, a decorative pattern A) that forms a pattern including a component (for example, a symbol part 527s) and a first identification component (for example, a number (design 537
)), and a control means (for example, the game control device 10
0, production control device 300), and when the first type symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the control means sets the outline display of the first identification component to the first mode (for example, non-highlighted display), swinging the first identification component in one direction (e.g., left-right direction) of a first direction (e.g., vertical axis rotation direction) and a second direction (e.g., left-right direction) different from the first direction; When the type 2 pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the contour display of the first identifying element is set to a second form (for example, highlighted display) that is thicker than the first form, and the first identifying element is displayed in the first form. direction and the second direction (for example, vertical axis rotation direction and left-right direction) (see FIGS. 17, 19, and 20).

(2) The gaming machine 10 is a display means (for example, display a device 41), a first identification component (for example, a number (numeral portion 527n)) having an identification ability to specify a pattern by a character attribute, and a second identification having an identification ability to specify a pattern by a non-character attribute. A first type pattern (for example, a decorative pattern A) that forms a pattern including a component (for example, a symbol part 527s) and a first identification component (for example, a number (design 537
)), and a control means (for example, the game control device 10
0, production control device 300), and when the second type symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the control means sets the outline display of the first identification component to the first mode (for example, non-highlighted display), The first identification component is rocked in both a first direction (eg, longitudinal axis rotation) and a second direction (eg, left-right direction) different from the first direction (eg, longitudinal axis rotation and left-right direction). When moving to temporarily stop and display the type 1 symbol, the outline display of the first identifying element is changed to a second form (for example, highlighted display) that is thicker than the first form, and the first identifying element is displayed in the first form. and the second direction (for example, left-right direction) (see FIGS. 17, 19, and 21).

(3) The gaming machine 10 is a display means (for example, display a device 41), a first identification component (for example, a number (numeral portion 527n)) having an identification ability to specify a pattern by a character attribute, and a second identification having an identification ability to specify a pattern by a non-character attribute. A first type pattern (for example, a decorative pattern A) that forms a pattern including a component (for example, a symbol part 527s) and a first identification component (for example, a number (design 537
)), and a control means (for example, the game control device 10
0, production control device 300), and when the first type symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the control means sets the outline display of the first identification component to the first mode (for example, non-highlighted display), The first identification component is rocked in both a first direction (eg, longitudinal axis rotation) and a second direction (eg, left-right direction) different from the first direction (eg, longitudinal axis rotation and left-right direction). When moving to temporarily stop and display the type 2 symbol, the outline display of the first identifying element is changed to a second form (for example, highlighted display) that is thicker than the first form, and the first identifying element is displayed in the first form. and the second direction (for example, left-right direction) (see FIGS. 19, 20, and 22).

(4) The gaming machine 10 is a display means (for example, display a device 41), a first identification component (for example, a number (numeral portion 527n)) having an identification ability to specify a pattern by a character attribute, and a second identification having an identification ability to specify a pattern by a non-character attribute. A first type pattern (for example, a decorative pattern A) that forms a pattern including a component (for example, a symbol part 527s) and a first identification component (for example, a number (design 537
)), and a control means (for example, the game control device 10
0, production control device 300), and when the second type symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the control means sets the outline display of the first identification component to the first mode (for example, non-highlighted display), swinging the first identification component in one direction (e.g., left-right direction) of a first direction (e.g., vertical axis rotation direction) and a second direction (e.g., left-right direction) different from the first direction; When the type 1 pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the contour display of the first identifying element is set to a second form (for example, highlighted display) that is thicker than the first form, and the first identifying element is displayed in the first form. direction and the second direction (for example, vertical axis rotation direction and left-right direction) (see FIGS. 19, 21, and 22).

(5) The gaming machine 10 has a first display area (for example, the display area of the large symbol group 501) and a second display area (for example, , the display area 540 of the small pattern group 502), and a control means capable of independently deriving the result mode of the variable display game in the first display area and the second display area. (For example, the game control device 100, the effect control device 300) and, the control means,
A first pattern group (for example, a large pattern group 501) is variably displayed in a first display area, and a second pattern group (for example, a small pattern group 502) smaller than the first pattern group is variably displayed in the first display area. At this time, the thickness of the outline display during the variable display for each symbol in the second symbol group is made thinner than the thickness of the outline display during the stop of the variation (see FIG. 24).

(6) Gaming machine 10 includes display means (for example, display device 41) capable of displaying effects related to variable display games (for example, special figure 1 game, special figure 2 game), and message display (message display effect 593 ), the message display is configured to include a character portion (message portion 595) and a background portion (background portion 594) serving as the background of the character portion, and the character portion is enlarged while the size of the background portion is fixed. Along with displaying, a control unit (for example, game control device 100, effect control device 300) that changes the outline display of the character part from the first thickness to the second thickness different from the first thickness ( See Figure 23).

(7) The gaming machine 10 is a display means (for example, display a device 41), a first identification component (for example, a number (numeral portion 527n)) having an identification ability to specify a pattern by a character attribute, and a second identification having an identification ability to specify a pattern by a non-character attribute. A first type pattern (for example, a decorative pattern A) that forms a pattern including a component (for example, a symbol part 527s) and a first identification component (for example, a number (design 537
)), and a control means (for example, the game control device 10
0, production control device 300), and when the first type symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the control means sets the outline display of the first identification component to the first mode (for example, non-highlighted display), swinging the first identification component in one direction (e.g., left-right direction) of a first direction (e.g., vertical axis rotation direction) and a second direction (e.g., left-right direction) different from the first direction; When the type 2 symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the contour display of the first identifying element is set to a second form (for example, non-highlighted display) thinner than the first form, and the first identifying element is displayed in the first form. and the second direction (for example, the vertical axis rotation direction and the left-right direction) (see FIGS. 17, 19, and 21)
.

(8) The gaming machine 10 has display means (for example, display a device 41), a first identification component (for example, a number (numeral portion 527n)) having an identification ability to specify a pattern by a character attribute, and a second identification having an identification ability to specify a pattern by a non-character attribute. A first type pattern (for example, a decorative pattern A) that forms a pattern including a component (for example, a symbol part 527s), and a pattern that contains a first identification component and excludes a second identification component. and a control means (for example, the game control device 100, the effect control device 300) for switching between the second type symbol (for example, the decorative symbol B) and displaying it on the display means, and the control means is the first When the seed pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the contour display of the first identification component is set to the first mode (for example, non-highlighted display), and the first identification component is rotated in the first direction (for example, the vertical axis rotation direction). and a second direction different from the first direction (for example, the horizontal direction).
Outline representation of the first identifying component in a second aspect (e.g., highlighting) that is thicker than the first aspect, and the first identifying component in at least one of the first and second orientations 17, 19, 20
reference).

(9) The gaming machine 10 has display means (for example, display a device 41), a first identification component (for example, a number (numeral portion 527n)) having an identification ability to specify a pattern by a character attribute, and a second identification having an identification ability to specify a pattern by a non-character attribute. A first type pattern (for example, a decorative pattern A) that forms a pattern including a component (for example, a symbol part 527s), and a pattern that contains a first identification component and excludes a second identification component. and a control means (for example, the game control device 100, the effect control device 300) for switching between the second type symbol (for example, the decorative symbol B) and displaying it on the display means, and the control means is the first When the seed pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the contour display of the first identifying component is set to the first mode (for example, highlighted display), and the first identifying component is set to the first direction (for example,
vertical axis rotation direction) or a second direction different from the first direction (for example, left-right direction), and the second type symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. , outlining the first identifying component in a second aspect (e.g., non-highlighting) that is narrower than the first aspect, and moving the first identifying component in at least one of the first orientation and the second orientation. 17, 19, and 21 (Figs. 17, 19, 21
reference).

[Second embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, which can change the thickness of the outline display for each part of the decorative pattern, will be described. First, the outline display switching of the decorative pattern during temporary stop display by rotating the vertical axis will be described with reference to FIG. 25 . FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop mode of decorative symbols according to the second embodiment.

Fig. 25(1) shows that "7" (design 537) of the decorative design B shown in Fig. 25(1) rotates along the vertical axis and is temporarily stopped. A pattern 550 shows a state in which "7" of the decorative pattern B is rotated counterclockwise on the vertical axis by a predetermined angle. A pattern 551 shows a state in which "7" of the decorative pattern B is viewed from the front. The pattern 552 is
It shows how "7" of the decorative pattern B is rotated rightward on the vertical axis by a predetermined angle. For example, the gaming machine 10 can perform temporary stop display by switching from the symbol 550 to the symbol 551 to the symbol 552 and from the symbol 552 to the symbol 551 to the symbol 550 .

At this time, as shown in FIG. 25(2), the gaming machine 10 can switch the thickness (degree of emphasis) of the contour display for each switching target contour display portion (the left half of the pattern, the right half of the pattern). .
The gaming machine 10 uses the left half of the pattern 550 as the left portion 550L and the right half of the pattern 550 as the right portion 550L.
When 0R, the contour display of the left part 550L, which seems to move away, is thinned (
(non-highlighted display, ambiguous display), and the outline display of the right portion 550R, which seems to move in the approaching direction, is displayed thicker (highlighted display). In other words, the gaming machine 10 displays the contour display of the left portion 550L, which is seen farther than the right portion 550R, thinner than the contour display of the right portion 550R, and displays the contour display of the left portion 550R.
The contour display of the right portion 550R, which looks closer than 0L, is displayed thicker than the contour display of the left portion 550L.

Further, when the left half of the pattern 551 is the left part 551L and the right half of the pattern 551 is the right part 551R, the gaming machine 10 sets the outline display of the left part 551L and the outline display of the right part 551R to the standard thickness. (standard display). In other words, the gaming machine 10 displays the contour display of the left portion 551L and the contour display of the right portion 551R, which appear at approximately the same depth position, with the same thickness (standard thickness).

Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the left half of the pattern 552 is the left portion 552L and the right half of the pattern 552 is the right portion 552R, the contour display of the left portion 552L that appears to move in the approaching direction is thickened (highlighted). ), and thinly (non-highlighted, vaguely displayed) the outline display of the right portion 552R that appears to move away. In other words, the gaming machine 10 has the left part 552L
The contour display of the right portion 552R, which is seen farther, is displayed thinner than the contour display of the left portion 552L,
The contour display of the left portion 552L, which looks closer than the right portion 552R, is displayed thicker than the contour display of the right portion 552R.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can easily grasp the temporary stop display state of the decorative symbols. The left part or the right part of the pattern may be uniformly highlighted or non-emphasized, but the degree of emphasis or non-emphasis is changed according to the distance from the vertical axis (central axis). You may do so. For example, when emphasizing the contour display of the right portion 550R of the pattern 550, the gaming machine 10 can thicken the contour display (increase the rate of change or the amount of change) at a position farther from the vertical axis (central axis). , when the contour display of the left part 550L of the pattern 550 is non-emphasized, the contour display can be made thinner (the rate of change or the amount of change is increased) as the position is farther from the vertical axis (central axis).

Next, as another example of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, outline display switching of decorative symbols during temporary stop display by rocking in the horizontal direction will be described with reference to FIG. 26 . FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop mode of decorative symbols in a modification of the second embodiment.

Fig. 26(1) shows that "7" (design 537) of the decorative design B shown in Fig. 26(1) swings in the horizontal direction to display a temporary stop. A pattern 560 shows a state in which the "7" of the decorative pattern B has moved leftward from the normal position by a predetermined amount. A pattern 561 shows a state in which "7" of the decorative pattern B is in the correct position. A pattern 562 shows a state in which "7" of the decorative pattern B has moved rightward from the normal position by a predetermined amount. For example, the gaming machine 10 can perform a temporary stop display by switching from the symbol 560 to the symbol 561 to the symbol 562 and from the symbol 562 to the symbol 561 to the symbol 560 .

At this time, the gaming machine 10 can switch the thickness (emphasis level) of the outline display, as shown in FIG. 26(2). The gaming machine 10 assumes that the left half of the pattern 560 is the left portion 560L and the right half of the pattern 560 is the right portion 560R. The outline display is displayed thin (non-highlighted display, ambiguous display), and the outline display of the right portion 560R, which appears to move toward the center of the display position, is displayed thick (highlighted display). In other words, the gaming machine 10 displays the contour display of the left portion 560L, which appears farther from the display position center than the right portion 560R, to be thinner than the contour display of the right portion 560R, and displays the contour display of the right portion 560L, which appears closer to the display position center than the left portion 560L. The contour display of the portion 560R is displayed thicker than the contour display of the left portion 560L.

When the left half of the pattern 561 is the left part 561L and the right half of the pattern 561 is the right part 561R, the gaming machine 10 sets the contour display of the left part 561L and the contour display of the right part 561R to standard thickness. (standard display). In other words, the gaming machine 10 displays the contour display of the left portion 561L and the contour display of the right portion 561R, which appear at approximately the same position from the center of the display position, with the same thickness (standard thickness).

Also, in the gaming machine 10, when the left half of the symbol 562 is the left portion 562L and the right half of the symbol 562 is the right portion 562R, the left portion 562 appears to move toward the center of the display position.
The contour display of L is displayed thick (highlighted), and the contour display of the right portion 562R, which seems to move away from the center of the display position, is displayed thin (non-highlighted display, ambiguous display). In other words, the gaming machine 10 displays the contour display of the right portion 562R, which appears farther from the display position center than the left portion 562L, to be thinner than the contour display of the left portion 562L, and displays the contour display of the left portion 562R, which appears closer to the display position center than the right portion 562R. The contour display of the portion 562L is displayed thicker than the contour display of the right portion 562R.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can easily grasp the temporary stop display state of the decorative symbols. The left part or the right part of the pattern may be uniformly highlighted or non-emphasized, but the degree of emphasis or non-emphasis is changed according to the distance from the vertical axis (central axis). You may do so. For example, when emphasizing the contour display of the left part 560L of the pattern 560, the gaming machine 10 can make the contour display thicker as the position farther from the vertical axis (central axis) is displayed, and the contour display of the right part 560R of the pattern 560 can be made thicker. is de-highlighted, the outline display can be thinned as the position is farther from the vertical axis (central axis).

Next, as another example of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, outline display switching target portions of symbols will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of an outline display switching target portion during temporary stop display of decorative symbols according to the second embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the game machine 10 can divide the pattern into a left half and a right half along the vertical center line, and the two parts can be used as switching target outline display parts. for example,
A pattern 570 shown in FIG. 27(1) is divided into a left portion 570a and a right portion 570b, and the left portion 570a and the right portion 570b are used as outline display switching target portions, and outline display can be switched between emphasized display and non-emphasized display. can switch to

In the game machine 10, a portion on one side of the pattern (one side portion) and a portion on the other side (other side portion) are set as portions to be subjected to outline display switching of the pattern, and the remaining portions are subjected to outline display of the pattern. It may not be a switching target portion. For example, a design 571 shown in FIG. 27(2) has a one-side portion 571a and an other-side portion 571b. and non-highlighted.
Further, in the design 571 shown in FIG. 27(2), the remaining portions that are not set as the one side portion 571a and the other side portion 571b are not set as the outline display switching target portion.

It is desirable that the one side portion and the other side portion of the pattern have a symmetrical positional relationship with respect to the center of the pattern, but the positional relationship is not limited to this and may be any positional relationship. Further, the one side portion and the other side portion of the pattern are desirably set in relation to the swinging mode of the pattern when the pattern is temporarily stopped, but they are not limited to this and may be set in any positional relationship. may

Also, the gaming machine 10 may set only a part of the pattern as the outline display switching target portion of the symbol, and not set the remaining part as the outline display switching target portion of the symbol. For example, in FIG. 27 (3
), a part 572a is set, and the part 572a can be used as a contour display switching target part to switch the contour display between emphasized display and non-emphasized display. Further, in the pattern 572 shown in FIG. 27(3), the remaining portion which is not set as the portion 572a is not set as the contour display switching target portion.

Note that the outline display switching target portion of the pattern is not limited to one, and two or three or more may be set, and may be set in an arbitrary positional relationship that contributes to the perception of the temporary stop display. can be anything.

The gaming machine 10 (including modifications) of the second embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 is a display means (for example, a display device) capable of displaying a variable display game (for example, a special figure 1 game, a special figure 2 game) that variably displays symbols (for example, symbols 570, 571, 572) 41), a first state (for example, standard thickness) in which the contour display of the pattern is set to the first thickness when the pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and a first portion of the pattern (for example, the left portion 570a,
a control means for causing the display means to display the one side portion 571a, the portion 572a) as a second thickness (for example, highlighted) that is thicker than the first thickness (see FIGS. 25 to 27).

(2) The control means of (1) controls the remaining second symbols (for example, symbols 570 and 571).
The part (for example, the right part 570b, the other side part 571b) is displayed on the display means as a second state (for example, non-highlighted display) having a third thickness thinner than the first thickness (FIGS. 25 to 2).
7).

[Third Embodiment]
In the description of the game machine of the first embodiment, the game machine is provided with the game board 30, but in the third embodiment, the game machine is provided with a game board 800 (see FIG. 28) different from the game board 30. . FIG. 28 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the third embodiment. In addition, the first
The same reference numerals may be used to omit the description of the configurations similar to those of the embodiment.

A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 800 . The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 800 . In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 820 having a display device (variable display device) 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 830 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 820 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 820 . That is, the center case 8
20 surrounds the periphery of the display area of the display device 830 and protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 830 so as to prevent game balls from jumping into the surrounding game area 32 .

The display device 830 is composed of a device having a display screen capable of dot-matrix display using LEDs. Note that the display device 830 may be, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), a CRT (
It may be composed of a device having a display screen such as a cathode ray tube. In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), information related to the game such as multiple identification information (special symbols), characters that direct the special symbol fluctuation display game, and background images that enhance the performance effect are displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 830, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. Also, on the display screen, an image (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed based on the progress of the game.

Further, a board effect device 44 is provided on the upper part of the center case 820 for effecting a game by operating it. The board rendering device 44 can operate toward the center of the display device 830 from the state shown in FIG.

On the lower right side of the center case 820 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 that provides a starting condition for the normal pattern fluctuation display game. A game ball that has won the normal pattern starting gate 34 (a game ball passing through the normal pattern starting gate 34) is detected by a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 29).

In addition, the general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower left side of the center case 820 in the game area 32, and the general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 820 and on the right side of the special variable winning device 95 described later. are placed. The game balls that have won these general winning openings 35 are
It is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 29).

In addition, below the center case 820 in the game area 32, a starting winning opening 36 forming a first starting winning opening (starting winning area) that provides the starting condition of the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) (start port 1) is provided. A game ball that has entered the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 29).

In addition, below the starting winning opening 36, an out opening 30a is provided for collecting game balls that have not won a winning opening or the like.
In addition, a normal variable winning device 37 ( A second starting prize opening, a starting prize winning area) are provided. The normal variable prize winning device 37 (starting port 2) is provided with a movable member 37b at a position serving as an inflow portion. The movable member 37b is slid forward and backward by means of a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 29) to prevent game balls from flowing into the inflow portion, and retreats backward to prevent game balls from flowing into the inflow portion. can be changed to an allowable state that allows The movable member 37b normally maintains a closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player). Then, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the state is changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is the starting port 2 switch 37a (
29). In addition, it is also possible to make it possible to win prizes even when the normal variable prize winning device 37 is closed, and make it more difficult to win prizes in the closed state than in the open state. Ordinary fluctuation winning device 37
corresponds to ordinary electric accessories (Puden).

Also, on the right side of the center case 820 in the game area 32, there is a special figure variation display game (
A special variable winning device (large winning opening 1) 38 is provided that can be converted into a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept game balls depending on the results of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game. . The special variable winning device 38 has an opening and closing member (movable piece) 38c, and depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game, the opening and closing member 38c closes the large winning opening (disadvantageous for the player). The opening/closing member 38c retracts from the closed state) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which the game ball flowing down the game area 32 can be received. That is, the special variable winning device 38 has a large winning opening (large winning opening 1) opened and closed by an opening/closing member 38c driven by a large winning opening 1 solenoid 38b (see FIG. 29) as a driving device,
During the jackpot game state (special game state) as a result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the jackpot game state (special game state) due to winning a specific area 96 described later
In the middle, the closed state of the large winning opening is changed to the open state, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening, thereby providing a predetermined game value (prizing balls) to the player. ing. In addition, inside the big winning opening (winning area), a big winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 29) as a detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening is arranged. .

In addition, on the lower right side of the center case 820 in the game area 32, a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept the game ball depending on the result of the special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game and special figure 2 variation display game) A special variable prize winning device (large prize winning port 2) 95 that can be converted to and is provided. The special variable winning device 95 has an opening and closing member (opening and closing door) 95c, and depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game, the opening and closing member 95c closes the large winning opening (disadvantageous for the player). The opening/closing member 95c retracts from the closed state) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which the game ball flowing down the game area 32 can be received. That is, the special variable winning device 95 includes a large winning opening (large winning opening 2) opened and closed by an opening and closing member 95c driven by a large winning opening 2 solenoid 95b (see FIG. 29) as a driving device, and a special figure 1 variation During the small winning game state according to the results of the display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the large winning hole is changed from the closed state to the open state to facilitate the inflow of the game balls into the big winning hole and play the game. A predetermined game value (a prize ball) is given to the player. In addition, inside the big winning opening (winning area), a big winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 29) as a detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening is arranged. .

Also, the special variable winning device 95 has a V flow path that guides a game ball that has won a prize in the winning opening to a specific area 96 . The special variable winning device 95 is provided with a specific area switch 95e (see FIG. 29) for detecting game balls that have flowed into the specific area 96. FIG. Note that the specific area switch 95e
The detection of the game ball (winning to the specific area 96) is performed by the special variable winning device (large winning opening 1) 3
It is one of the conditions for generating a jackpot game state (special game state) in which the closed state of the 8 is changed to the opened state.

Also, the center case 820 does not have a warp flow path, but may have a warp flow path. For example, a warp port (warp inlet) is provided on the left side of the center case 820, and the game ball that has flowed into the warp channel from the warp port rolls on the stage in the center case 820, and part of it is used as the warp outlet. You may make it guide. In that case, the warp exit may be positioned directly above the start winning opening 36 so that the game ball guided to the warp exit can easily enter the starting winning opening 36.例文帳に追加

In the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, the left area of the center case 820 in the game area 32 where the game balls flow down is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 820 is the right game area. It is said that Then, the player adjusts the shooting force and shoots the game ball to the left game area (so-called left hitting), aiming to win a prize in the starting prize opening 36 or the general prize winning opening 35 (located in the left game area). , and by launching a game ball to the right game area (so-called right hitting), the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, the special variable winning device 38, 95
, a general winning slot 35 (located in the right game area) and the like.

In addition, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 800), the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game that constitute the special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34 A general display device 5 that displays a general pattern variation display game triggered by winning a prize and displays various information
0 is provided.

The collective display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of an LED or the like, a special figure 1 reserved display unit 52, a special figure 1 design display unit 53, a special figure 2 design display unit 54, and a general design design display unit. 55, a normal map reservation display section 56, and a state display section 57 (see FIG. 5). Details of the collective display device 50 will be described later.

The gaming machine 10 is provided with a right-handed guide display device 91 on the right side near the special variable winning device (large winning opening 1) 38 . The right-handed guide display device 91 lights up when guiding the player to hit right, and goes off in other states. The right-handed guide display device 91 is included in the board decoration device 46 .

The gaming machine 10 is provided with a win opportunity guide display device 92 near and above a special variable prize winning device (big prize winning port 2) 95 . The winning chance guidance display device 92 guides the winning chance to the player in a lighting mode. For example, the winning chance guidance display device 92 lights the LED corresponding to the message "Two more chances" when there are two winning chances, and turns off the rest. In addition, the winning chance guide display device 92 lights the LED corresponding to the message "one more chance" when there is one winning chance, and turns off the rest. The winning opportunity guide display device 92 lights the LED corresponding to the message "Blooming" during the next and subsequent winnings with the winning chance, and turns off the rest. The winning opportunity guide display device 92 is included in the board decoration device 46 .

The gaming machine 10 includes a special figure game variation display state display device 98 at the lower right of the center case 50 in the gaming area 32 . The special figure game variation display state display device 98 is a so-called fourth symbol display device and is composed of two LEDs. The special figure game variable display state display device 98 displays the variable display state of the special figure 1 variable display game with the left LED, and displays the variable display state of the special figure 2 variable display game with the right LED. For example, the special figure game variation display state display device 98 notifies the symbol stop state of the special figure variation display game by lighting, and notifies the symbol variation state of the special figure variation display game by blinking. Note that the special figure game variation display state display device 98 is included in the board decoration device 46 .

The game machine 10 has a normal figure fluctuation display device 9 on the right side of the center case 50 in the game area 32 .
3 and a normal map holding display device 94. The general pattern variation display device 93 is composed of two LEDs, and notifies the variation display state of the general pattern game by alternate blinking, and notifies the variation display result of the general pattern game by a combination of lighting or extinguishing. In addition, the general map holding display device 94 has two LED
It is composed of , and informs the number of normal figure holdings from 0 to 4 according to the combination mode of turning off, lighting, and blinking. The normal pattern fluctuation display device 93 and the normal pattern reservation display device 94 are included in the board decoration device 46 .

Next, a game machine control system will be described with reference to FIG. In the explanation of the game machine of the first embodiment, the game machine is provided with the game control device 100, but the third embodiment is provided with a game control device 100a (see FIG. 29) different from the game control device 100. It will be explained as a gaming machine. FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing an example of a game machine control system according to the third embodiment. It should be noted that the same reference numerals may be used for the same configuration as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof may be omitted.

The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100a. The game control device 100a is a main control device (main board) for overall control of the game, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. and an input unit 120 having an input port
, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130, and the like.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes the starting opening 1 switch 36 in the starting winning opening 36
a, starting port 2 switch 37a in normal variable winning device 37, gate switch 34a in normal starting gate 34, winning port switch 35a, special variable winning device 38, 95 big winning port switch 38a, special variable winning device 95 specific area switch 38e, and a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is input and converted into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V (an interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and is connected to the special variable winning device 38 (large winning port 1). Large prize winning port 2 solenoid 9 for opening and closing the opening/closing member 95c of the winning port 2)
A first output port 134a is provided for outputting opening/closing data of 5b, opening/closing data of the general electric solenoid 37c for opening/closing the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and display data of the performance display device 135. FIG.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing of the game control device 100a will be explained using FIG. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the third embodiment. In the timer interrupt processing of the third embodiment, step S830 is performed between steps S83 and S84.
is different from the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment.

The control unit performs special figure 1 game processing (step S82) that performs processing related to the special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 game processing that performs processing related to the special figure 2 variation display game (step S
83), the second type game processing (step S830) for performing the processing regarding the so-called two types game is executed, and then the normal pattern game processing (step S84) for processing regarding the normal pattern variation display game is executed.

Next, the game performance of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment will be explained using FIG. Figure 3
1 is a diagram showing an example of game performance of the gaming machine of the third embodiment. The gaming machine 10 has so-called 1 type + 2 type game properties. The game property called type 1 enables the derivation of a big hit as a result of a random number lottery in a special game (variation display game), and the result of the random number lottery is produced by the variable display of symbols. The two types of game features make it possible to derive a big win by detecting winning in a specific area 96 at a predetermined timing.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can execute a special figure 1 game and a special figure 2 game as special figure games. The special figure 1 game can execute one variable display triggered by one winning to the start winning port 36, and can store up to four (maximum number of pending) execution rights of variable display. special figure 1
The game has a jackpot probability of 1/199, a small win probability of 0/199, and a remainder of 198
/199 is a miss. In the special figure 1 game, 1/3 of the big hits are with general electric support, and 2/3 of the big hits are without general electric support.

The special figure 2 game can execute one variable display triggered by one winning to the normal variable winning device 37, and can store up to one variable display execution right (maximum number of reservations). . In the special figure 2 game, the big hit probability is 1/199, the small hit probability is 198/199, and the loss is 0/199. Special figure 2 game is 1/3 of the big hits (probability with support at the time of big hits)
are assumed to have general electric support, and 2/3 of the big hits (probability of no support at the time of big hit) are assumed to have no general electric support. In addition, although the gaming machine 10 assumes that the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game have the same jackpot probability, they may be different.

Due to the nature of the game, the type 2 game does not set the maximum number of reservations, the probability of a big win, or the probability of a small win.
In the two-type game, 1/3 of the jackpots are supported by general electricity, and 2/3 of the jackpots are not supported by general electricity. In the gaming machine 10, the probability with support at the time of a big hit and the probability without support at the time of a big hit are the same for the special figure 1 game, the special figure 2 game, and the type 2 game, but they may be different for all games. and may be different in some games.

Next, the game characteristics of the gaming machine 10 having such game performance will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of game state transition of the gaming machine of the third embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 can be controlled by switching between a support state with general electric support and a support non-support state without general electric support. Moreover, the gaming machine 10 can be controlled by fixing the lottery probability of the special figure game to a low probability. That is, the gaming machine 10 has a "no support / low probability" state in which there is no general electric support and the lottery probability of the special game is low, and there is general electric support and the lottery probability of the special game is low. It can be controlled by switching between a certain "with support/low probability" state.

The "no support/low probability" state includes "normal mode" and "chance mode". "Normal mode" in the "no support/low probability" state is a gaming state in which the special figure 1 game is executed. "
The "chance mode" in the "no support/low probability" state is a gaming state in which the special figure 2 game is executed. The "with support/low probability" state includes "normal mode". The "normal mode" in the "with support/low probability" state is a gaming state in which the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game is executed.

In the gaming machine 10, the "normal mode" in the "no support/low probability" state is the initial state when the player starts the game. The gaming machine 10 transitions from the “normal mode” in the “no support/low probability” state to the “support/low probability” state when the transition condition “state transition A” is satisfied. The transition condition “state transition A” is the end of the jackpot with support derived in the special figure 1 game. The gaming machine 10 remains in the "no support/low probability" state when the transition condition "state transition B" is established from the "normal mode" in the "no support/low probability" state. Transition condition "state transition B
” is the end of the no-support jackpot derived in the special figure 1 game.

The gaming machine 10 remains in the “support/low probability” state when the transition condition “state transition C” is satisfied from the “normal mode” in the “support/low probability” state. Transition condition "state transition C"
is the end of the big hit with support derived in the special figure 1 game or the special figure 2 game (including the two types of games executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game). The gaming machine 10 transitions from the "normal mode" in the "with support/low probability" state to the "without support/low probability" state when the transition condition "state transition D" is established. The transition condition “state transition D” is the end of the general electricity support.

General electricity support is the end condition (condition 1) when one execution of the variable display in the special figure 2 game is completed
and Also, in addition to condition 1, the general electric support is a variable display N times in the special figure 1 game (
For example, the end condition (condition 2) is the end of execution (4 times greater than the end condition in the special figure 2 game). Furthermore, in addition to the conditions 1 and 2, the general electric support sets the termination condition (condition 3) that a small hit occurs once.
It should be noted that, when the no-support jackpot is derived in the special figure 2 game (including the second game executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game), the end of the no-support jackpot is the transition condition "state transition D
” is established.

The gaming machine 10 transitions from the "chance mode" in the "no support/low probability" state to the "support/low probability" state when the transition condition "state transition E" is satisfied. The transition condition "state transition E" is the end of the jackpot with support derived in the special figure 2 game (including the two types of games executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game). The game machine 10 remains in the "no support/low probability" state when the transition condition "state transition F" is established from the "chance mode" in the "no support/low probability" state. However, the "chance mode" becomes the "normal mode" when the transition condition "state transition F" is satisfied. The transition condition “state transition F” is the end of the no-support jackpot derived in the special figure 2 game (including the second game executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game).

A game progress in such a gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 33 shows
FIG. 11 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a game sequence of the gaming machine of the third embodiment; game machine 1
0 can expect winning to the starting winning port 36 in the "no support / low probability" state, and can not expect winning to the normal variable winning device 37, so guides the game progress by the left-handed game instead of the right-handed game. do. Therefore, the game machine 10 can expect the occurrence of special figure 1 suspension in the "no support / low probability" state, but cannot expect the occurrence of special figure 2 suspension. Therefore, the gaming machine 10
It is normal to be a "normal mode" that executes the variable display of the special figure 1 game in the "no support / low probability" state.

Sequence 1 indicates that the game state is "jackpot (with general electric support)" derived as a variable display result in the special figure 1 game. Game state "big hit (with normal electric support)"
is in the process of hitting the jackpot, with general electric support “none”, probability fluctuation “low probability”, special figure 1 pending number “
4”, the number of special figures 2 reserved is “0”. The game state "jackpot (with general electric support)" changes to "with general electric support" after the jackpot ends. The game machine 10 guides the progress of the right-handed game, since the special variable winning device (big winning port 1) 38 can be expected to win a prize during the big win. In addition, the game machine 10 guides the progress of the right-handed game, since winning to the normal variable winning device 37 can be expected in the "with support/low probability" state after the end of the big win.

Sequence 2 shows the game state "special figure 1 symbol variation" after the end of the big hit. The gaming machine 10
The special figure 2 game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 game, but since the special figure 2 reservation number is still "0", the special figure 1 reservation number "4" is set to "3" and the special figure 1 game is executed. Run.

Sequence 3 indicates the game state "special figure 1 symbol variation". The game machine 10 changes the special figure 2 reserved number "0" to "1" when winning to the normal variable winning device 37 occurs during the variable display of the special figure 1 game. It should be noted that the game machine 10, even if two or more winning to the normal variable winning device 37 occurs, the special figure 2
According to the maximum number of reservations, the upper limit is the number of special figures 2 reservations "1".

Sequence 4 indicates the game state "special figure 1 symbol stop (loss)". Sequence 5 indicates the game state "special figure 2 symbol variation". Since the game machine 10 is a special figure 2 reservation number "1",
The special figure 2 reserved number "1" is set to "0" and the special figure 2 game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 game.

Sequence 6 indicates the game state "special figure 2 symbol variation". The game machine 10 changes the special figure 2 reserved number "0" to "1" when winning to the normal variable winning device 37 occurs during the variable display of the special figure 2 game.

Sequence 7 indicates the game state "special figure 2 symbol stop (minor win/big win)". gaming machine 10
, when the big hit is derived as a result of the variation display in the special figure 2 game, it shifts to the big hit operation (type 1 game big hit operation) as it is, and when the small hit is derived as a result of the variation display in the special figure 2 game, special The variable prize winning device (big prize winning port 2) 95 is opened, and a big winning operation (second type game big winning operation) is performed under the condition of winning a prize in the specific area 96 (second type game).

Sequence 8 indicates that the gaming state is "jackpot (no general electric support)" derived as a result of the special figure 2 game (including the second game executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game). . The game state "jackpot (no general electric support)" is during the jackpot operation, general electric support "none", probability fluctuation "low probability", special figure 1 reservation number "3", special figure 2 reservation number "1" is. The game state "jackpot (no general electric support)" continues to become "no general electric support" after the end of the big hit. The game machine 10 cannot expect to win a prize to the normal variable winning device 37 in the "no support / low probability" state, but there is an opportunity to execute the special figure 2 game (the number of special figure 2 reservations "1"), and the special figure 2 Since the occurrence of a big hit can be expected as a result of the game (including the second game executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game), the game progress by the right-handed game is guided.

Sequence 9 indicates the game state "special figure 2 symbol variation". The gaming machine 10 has a special figure 2 reservation number "
1", the special figure 2 pending number "1" is set to "0" and the special figure 2 is prioritized over the special figure 1 game
run the game.

Sequence 10 indicates the game state "special figure 2 symbol stop (minor win/big win)". game machine 1
0, when a big hit is derived as a variation display result in the special figure 2 game, it shifts to a big win operation (type 1 game big win operation) as it is, and when a small hit is derived as a variation display result in the special figure 2 game. The special variable prize winning device (big prize winning port 2) 95 is opened, and a transition to a jackpot action (second game jackpot action) is made under the condition of winning a prize in a specific area 96 (second game).

Sequence 11 indicates that the gaming state is "jackpot (no general electricity support)" derived as a result of the special figure 2 game (including the second game executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game). . The game state "jackpot (no general electric support)" is a jackpot operation, general electric support "none", probability fluctuation "low probability", special figure 1 reservation number "3", special figure 2 reservation number "0" is. The game state "jackpot (no general electric support)" continues to become "no general electric support" after the end of the big win. The gaming machine 10 cannot expect winning to the normal variable winning device 37 in the "no support / low probability" state, there is no opportunity to execute the special figure 2 game (the number of special figure 2 reservations "0"), and the special figure 2 Since the occurrence of a big hit cannot be expected as a result of the game (including the second type game executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game), the progress of the left-handed game is guided.

Sequence 12 shows the game state "special figure 1 symbol variation" after the end of the big hit. The gaming machine 10 executes the special figure 2 game with priority over the special figure 1 game, but since the special figure 2 reservation number is "0", the special figure 1 reservation number "3" is set to "2". Figure 1 Run the game. Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 performs the game progress by executing the special figure 1 game unless a big hit is derived as a variation display result in the special figure 1 game.

That is, the gaming machine 10 has a game characteristic of obtaining a second chance to generate a big hit when a big win (with general electric support) is derived as a variable display result in the special figure 1 game. In addition, if the game machine 10 derives a further big win (with general electric support) among the next two opportunities to generate a big win, then the game machine 10 obtains two more opportunities to generate a big win after the big win.

Here, in the case of deriving a further big win (with normal electric support) in the next two opportunities for generating a big win, the game progresses assuming that the big win without normal electric support was with normal electric support in sequence 11. will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of the game sequence of the gaming machine of the third embodiment.

The sequence 11a is the gaming state "minor win/big win (with normal electric support)" derived as a result of the special figure 2 game (including two types of games executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game).
indicates that The game state "small hit / big hit (with general electric support)" is in the big hit operation, general electric support "none", probability fluctuation "low probability", special figure 1 reserved number "3", special figure 2 reserved number is "0". The game state "jackpot (with general electric support)" changes to "with general electric support" after the jackpot ends. The gaming machine 10 is equipped with a special variable winning device (big winning port 1
) 38 can be expected, the game progress by the right-handed game is guided. In addition, the game machine 10 guides the progress of the right-handed game, since winning to the normal variable winning device 37 can be expected in the "with support/low probability" state after the end of the big win.

The sequence 12a shows the game state "special figure 1 symbol variation" after the end of the big hit. gaming machine 10
will execute the special figure 2 game with priority over the special figure 1 game, but since the special figure 2 reservation number is still "0", the special figure 1 reservation number "3" is set to "2" and the special figure 1 run the game.

The sequence 13a indicates the game state "special figure 1 symbol variation". The game machine 10 changes the special figure 2 pending number "0" to "1" when winning to the normal variable winning device 37 occurs during the variable display of the special figure 1 game.
”.

The sequence 14a indicates the game state "special figure 1 symbol stop (loss)". sequence 15
a indicates the game state "special figure 2 symbol variation". Since the gaming machine 10 is the special figure 2 reserved number "1", the special figure 2 reserved number "1" is set to "0" and the special figure 2 game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 game.

The sequence 16a indicates the game state "special figure 2 symbol variation". The gaming machine 10 changes the special figure 2 pending number "0" to "1" when winning to the normal variable winning device 37 occurs during the variable display of the special figure 2 game.
”.

The sequence 17a indicates the game state "special figure 2 symbol stop (minor win/big win)". When the gaming machine 10 derives a big hit as a variation display result in the special figure 2 game, it shifts to a big win operation (1st kind game big win operation) as it is, and when a small win is derived as a variation display result in the special figure 2 game. , the special variable winning device (large winning opening 2) 95 is opened, and the specific area 96
Winning a prize in (2nd game) is a condition (2nd game), and the process shifts to a big win operation (2nd game big win operation).

The sequence 18a is the gaming state "minor win/big win (no electric power support)" derived as a result of the special figure 2 game (including the second type of game executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game).
indicates that The game state "small hit / big hit (no general electric support)" is in the big hit operation, general electric support "none", probability fluctuation "low probability", special figure 1 reserved number "2", special figure 2 reserved number is "1". The game state "jackpot (no general electric support)" continues to become "no general electric support" after the end of the big win. The gaming machine 10 cannot expect winning to the normal variable winning device 37 in the "no support / low probability" state, but there is an opportunity to execute the special figure 2 game (the number of special figure 2 reservations "1
”), and as a result of the special figure 2 game (including the second kind of game executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game), the occurrence of a big hit can be expected, so the game progress by the right-handed game is guided.

The sequence 19a indicates the game state "special figure 2 symbol variation". Since the gaming machine 10 is the special figure 2 reserved number "1", the special figure 2 reserved number "1" is set to "0" and the special figure 2 game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 game.

The sequence 20a indicates the game state "special figure 2 symbol stop (minor win/big win)". When the gaming machine 10 derives a big hit as a variation display result in the special figure 2 game, it shifts to a big win operation (1st kind game big win operation) as it is, and when a small win is derived as a variation display result in the special figure 2 game. , the special variable winning device (large winning opening 2) 95 is opened, and the specific area 96
Winning a prize in (2nd game) is a condition (2nd game), and the process shifts to a big win operation (2nd game big win operation).

The sequence 21a is the gaming state "minor win/big win (with normal electric support)" derived as a result of the special figure 2 game (including two types of games executed in relation to the result of the special figure 2 game).
indicates that The game state "small hit / big hit (with general electric support)" is in the big hit operation, general electric support "none", probability fluctuation "low probability", special figure 1 reserved number "2", special figure 2 reserved number is "0". The game state "jackpot (with general electric support)" changes to "with general electric support" after the jackpot ends. The game machine 10 guides the progress of the right-handed game because the winning to the normal variable winning device 37 can be expected in the "with support/low probability" state.

The sequence 22a shows the game state "special figure 1 symbol variation" after the end of the big hit. gaming machine 10
, Runs the special 2 game with priority over the special 1 game, but since the number of special figures 2 reserved is "0", the number of special figures 1 reserved "2" is set to "1" and the special figure 1 game to run. After that, the gaming machine 10
Unless a big hit is derived as a variable display result in the special figure 1 game, the game progresses by executing the special figure 1 game.

The sequence 23a indicates the game state "special figure 1 symbol variation". The game machine 10 changes the special figure 2 pending number "0" to "1" when winning to the normal variable winning device 37 occurs during the variable display of the special figure 1 game.
”.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 has a game property capable of obtaining a large number of chances to generate a big win by repeatedly obtaining two chances to generate a big win. At this time, the special figure 1 reservation number can be gradually reduced by repeatedly obtaining a big hit occurrence opportunity. However, the number of special figures 1 pending is the starting winning mouth 3
If there is a winning to 6, it can be increased, but since the game machine 10 guides the progress of the right-handed game while the chance of generating a big win can be repeated, a winning opportunity to the start winning opening 36 is obtained like left-handed. can't wait.

As a result, the gaming machine 10, which has obtained a large number of chances to generate a big hit, as shown in sequence m,
It can converge to special figure 1 reservation number "0". Even in such a case, as shown in the sequence m+1, it is possible to continue to generate a large number of big hits while obtaining the opportunity to generate the special figure 2 pending number.

In addition, after the special figure 1 reserved number "0", as shown in the sequence n to n + 1, a large number of hits continue to occur while obtaining the opportunity to generate the special figure 2 reserved number without changing the special figure 1 pattern. can do.

Of the sequences shown in FIG. 33, sequence 12 corresponds to the "normal mode" in the "no support/low probability" state shown in FIG. It corresponds to the "normal mode" in the "with/low probability" state, and sequences 9 and 10 correspond to the "chance mode" in the "no support/low probability" state shown in FIG.

Also, among the sequences shown in FIG. 34, sequences 12a to 17a, 22a, and 23
a, m, m+1, n to n+3 correspond to the "normal mode" in the "with support/low probability" state shown in FIG. ”
It corresponds to "chance mode" in the state.

Next, the variation display pattern selection of the special figure 2 game will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 35
Is a diagram showing an example of the variation display pattern selection table of the special figure 2 game of the third embodiment.

The special figure 2 game prepares a variation display pattern pt1 with a time value of 10000 ms (variation time), a variation display pattern pt2 with a time value of 20000 ms, a variation display pattern pt3 with a time value of 30000 ms, and a variation display pattern pt4 with a time value of 50000 ms. i.e.
The fluctuation time increases in the order of the fluctuation display patterns pt1, pt2, pt3, and pt4.

The gaming machine 10 refers to the total value of the special figure 1 reserved number and the special figure 2 reserved number in the selection of the variation display pattern of the special figure 2 game. If the total value of the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number is 2 or less,
The variable display pattern pt1 is selected with probability pr1, and the variable display pattern pt2 is selected with probability pr1.
The variable display pattern pt3 is selected with a probability pr3 smaller than the probability pr2, and the variable display pattern pt4 is selected with a probability pr4 smaller than the probability pr3. Also, when the total value of the number of special figures 1 reserved and the number of special figures 2 reserved is 3 or more, the variation display pattern pt1 is selected with a probability pr5, and the variation display pattern pt2 has a probability p greater than the probability pr5
The variable display pattern pt3 is selected with a probability pr7 greater than the probability pr6, and the variable display pattern pt4 is selected with a probability pr8 greater than the probability pr7.

In the gaming machine 10, as described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34, the number of reserved special figures 2 can only take a value of "0" or "1", and the number of reserved special figures 1 is a large number of jackpot occurrence opportunities. is obtained and gradually decreases and converges to "0". That is, the total value of the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number has a high probability that the number of occurrences of the big hit is small as the value is large, and a probability that the number of occurrences of the big hit is large as the value is small.

Therefore, the game machine 10 makes it easy for the player to select a variable display pattern with a longer variable time in the period when the player does not cool down after the first time, and secures the time for executing the highly interesting performance. sex. On the other hand, the game machine 10 ensures rapid game progress by making it easier for the player to select a variation display pattern with a smaller variation time in the period when the player has repeatedly won the jackpot many times from the first win. and

In this way, the game machine 10 can appropriately distribute between the execution of highly interesting effects and the rapid progress of the game according to the timing. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can both suppress a decrease in the willingness to play when a large number of chances of generating a big win are obtained, and improve the interest by various presentations.

In addition, the game machine 10 has a different probability of selecting a variation display pattern depending on whether the total value of the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number is 2 or less and 3 or more, but the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 1 reservation number The larger the total value of the special figure 2 pending number, the larger the fluctuation time is likely to be selected, and the smaller the total value of the special figure 1 pending number and the special figure 2 pending number, the smaller the variable display pattern. It is not limited to this as long as it is easily selected.

The ease of selection of a variable display pattern with a short variable time or the ease of selection of a variable display pattern with a long variable time can be defined by comparing the expected value of the variable time.

In addition, the game machine 10 refers only to the special figure 1 reserved number in the selection of the variation display pattern of the special figure 1 game, and the larger the special figure 1 reserved number, the easier it is to select a variation display pattern with a smaller variation time. .

In addition, the game machine 10 performs four temporary stop displays and one permanent stop display by four pseudo fluctuations in the fluctuation display pattern pt1 with a time value of 10000 ms.
In the fluctuation display pattern pt2 of s, 14 temporary stop displays and one real stop display are performed by 14 pseudo fluctuations, and 2
Twenty-four temporary stop indications and one final stop indication are performed by four pseudo fluctuations, and the time value is 50
In the fluctuation display pattern pt4 of 000 ms, the temporary stop display is performed 34 times by the pseudo fluctuation and the main stop display is performed once. The gaming machine 10 creates a sense of anticipation in the final stop display by the number of appearances of a specific symbol (for example, symbol “3” and symbol “7”) in the temporary stop display in each variable display pattern. For example, in the temporary stop display in each variation display pattern, the game machine 10 increases the number of appearances of the symbols “3” and “7”, and the greater the number of times the symbols “3” and “7” appear, the greater the chance of a big hit with the combination of the symbols “3” and the combination of the symbols “7”. Produce a sense of expectation to derive a big hit. Moreover, the gaming machine 10
may change the expectation depending on the appearance position or display mode of a specific pattern (for example, missing display, etc., which will be described later).

In addition, the gaming machine 10 regards a big win with a combination of symbols “3” and a big win with a combination of “7” symbols as a big win (with normal/electrical support), and a big win with other combinations of symbols (with normal/electrical support). None) to create a sense of anticipation. Note that the gaming machine 10 includes a collective display device 50
As long as it is possible to distinguish between the big hit and the small hit in the special figure 2 pattern display section 54, the decorative pattern may express the big hit and the small hit with the same combination of symbols.

Next, an overview of the display device 830 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of an overview of the display device according to the third embodiment. The display device 830 is mounted on the center case 820
and includes a pattern display area 700, a reserved display area 701, and decoration display areas 702 and 703.

The pattern display area 700 is located in the central portion of the display device 830 . The pattern display area 700 is
It is possible to display the design in the special figure game. The symbol display area 700 can notify the occurrence of a hit by a message, and has a message display area in addition to the symbol display area. In addition, the pattern display area 700 can display decorations such as cherry blossoms.
In addition to the side of the pattern display area, it has the side of the decoration display area. Details of the pattern display area 700 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The reserved display area 701 is adjacent to the symbol display area 700 and positioned below the symbol display area 700 . The pending display area 701 can display pending display in the special figure game. note that,
The reserved display area 701 can display a decorative display such as a cherry blossom storm, and has a side of a reserved display area as well as a decorative display area. Details of the pending display area 701 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The decorative display area 702 is adjacent to the reserved display area 701 and positioned below the reserved display area 701 . The decorative display area 702 can display a decorative display such as falling cherry blossoms. Decoration display area 703
is located above the symbol display area 700 adjacent to the symbol display area 700 . The decorative display area 703 can display a decorative display such as falling cherry blossoms. The decoration display areas 702 and 703 can perform decoration display in cooperation with the pattern display area 700 and the reserved display area 701 .

Next, an overview of the pattern display area 700 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of an overview of the pattern display area according to the third embodiment. In the symbol display area 700, a left symbol display area 704, a middle symbol display area 705 and a right symbol display area 706 are arranged horizontally. The symbol display area 700 displays a symbol "7" in the left symbol display area 704 and a symbol "7" in the middle symbol display area 705.
7” is displayed, and the symbol “7” is displayed in the right symbol display area 706 .

In the left pattern display area 704, the middle pattern display area 705, and the right pattern display area 706, segment display portions 707 and 708 each capable of independently controlling light emission are arranged in a matrix of 10 rows and 7 columns. The segment display portions 707 and 708 are shaped like cherry blossom petals, and can be illuminated in cherry blossom color by light emission control of LEDs. The segment display portion 707 has a petal shape with its end directed to the lower left, and the segment display portion 708 has a petal shape with its end directed to the upper right. The left design area 704, the middle design display area 705, and the right design display area 706 are respectively
Segment display portions 707 and segment display portions 708 are alternately arranged in the row direction and the column direction.

Next, the special symbol game symbols displayed in the symbol display area 700 by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of symbols displayed in the symbol display area in the special symbol game of the third embodiment.

A symbol 711 indicates a special symbol game symbol “1” displayed in the symbol display area 700 .
A symbol 712 indicates a special symbol game symbol “2” displayed in the symbol display area 700 . A symbol 713 indicates a special symbol game symbol “3” displayed in the symbol display area 700 . A symbol 714 indicates a special symbol game symbol “4” displayed in the symbol display area 700 . Design 7
15 indicates the symbol “5” of the special symbol game displayed in the symbol display area 700 . Design 71
6 indicates the symbol “6” of the special symbol game displayed in the symbol display area 700 . Design 717
indicates the symbol “7” of the special figure game displayed in the symbol display area 700 . A symbol 718 indicates a special symbol game symbol “8” displayed in the symbol display area 700 . The pattern 719 is
The symbol "9" of the special symbol game displayed in the symbol display area 700 is shown. A symbol 720 indicates a special symbol game symbol “0” displayed in the symbol display area 700 . A symbol 721 indicates a special symbol game symbol “cherry blossom” displayed in the symbol display area 700 . A symbol 722 indicates a symbol “flower” of the special symbol game displayed in the symbol display area 700 . A symbol 723 indicates a special symbol game symbol “treasure” displayed in the symbol display area 700 . A symbol 724 indicates the symbol “moon” of the special symbol game displayed in the symbol display area 700 . A symbol 725 indicates the symbol “light” of the special symbol game displayed in the symbol display area 700 .

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can display 15 kinds of symbols of the special figure game in the symbol display area 700 . These 15 types of patterns are different in display mode so as to be distinguishable from other patterns even if the lighting mode of any one of the segment display portions 707 and 708 is different.

For example, when a pattern is displayed on a 7-segment display section having 7 segments from a segment to g segment, the pattern "8" is displayed by lighting all segments from a segment to g segment.
” can be represented, and the symbol “0” can be represented by lighting from the a segment to the f segment excluding the g segment (central horizontal), and from the a segment to the d segment, f segment excluding the e segment (lower left vertical) , g segment lighting can represent the symbol "9". On the other hand, if the e-segment is also used for decoration and is lit up or extinguished differently, the design will lose its identifiability. However, the 15 displayed in the symbol display area 700
The seed pattern has a configuration in which one of the segment display portions 707 and 708 serves also as a decoration and has a different lighting mode so as not to lose its distinguishability. The most similar patterns among the 15 types of patterns displayed in the pattern display area 700 are the pattern "8" and the pattern "0". ” and the pattern “
0” difference. Therefore, the 15 kinds of patterns displayed in the pattern display area 700 are configured such that the recognizability as a pattern is not easily lost just by changing the lighting mode of some of the segment display portions like the 7-segment display portion. there is

Of the fifteen patterns displayed in the pattern display area 700, the pattern "3" and the pattern "
7" is a specific pattern that is a big hit (with general/electrical support) in a combination of the same type of patterns. In addition, among the 15 kinds of symbols displayed in the symbol display area 700, the symbols other than the symbol "3" and the symbol "7" are non-specific symbols that will result in a big hit (no normal/electrical support) in combination of the same kind of symbols. .

Next, an overview of the pending display area 701 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example of an overview of a reserved display area according to the third embodiment; The pending display area 701 includes a first pending display portion 731 capable of displaying the first pending display, a second pending display portion 732 capable of displaying the second pending display, and a third pending display portion 732 capable of displaying the third pending display. It includes a No. 4 reserved display portion 733, a No. 4 reserved display portion 734 capable of displaying the 4th reserved display, and decoration display portions 735, 736, and 737. FIG.

No. 1 reservation display portion 731, No. 2 reservation display portion 732, No. 3 reservation display portion 733, and No. 4 reservation display portion 734 respectively have one flower core-shaped segment display portion 731a and a segment display portion 731a. and five arranged petal-shaped segment display portions 731b. The segment display portion 731a and the segment display portion 731b can be illuminated in cherry blossom color by light emission control of the LED, and light emission control can be performed independently.

The pending display area 701 can perform the pending display of the special figure 1 game or the pending display of the special figure 2 game according to the gaming state. In addition, since the maximum number of reservations of the special figure 1 game is "4", the reservation display area 701 is the first reservation display unit 731, the second reservation display unit 732, and the third reservation display when performing the reservation display of the special figure 1 game. The holding display is performed using the part 733 and the No. 4 holding display part 734, but since the maximum holding number of the special figure 2 game is "1", when holding the special figure 2 game, only the No. 1 holding display part 731 is used to perform hold display.

The decorative display portions 735, 736, and 737 are shaped like cherry blossom petals, and are LEDs.
can be illuminated in cherry blossom color by light emission control. The decorative display portions 735, 736, and 737 each have a petal shape with the ends facing in random directions, and are responsible for the decorative display of the reserved display region 701, and cooperate with the pattern display region 700 and the decorative display regions 702 and 703. Decorative display can be performed.

Next, a description will be given, with reference to FIG. 40, of the animation of the pending display that is performed when the pending memory is generated. FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating an example of an animation of occurrence of a hold display according to the third embodiment.

The No. 1 pending display portion 731, No. 2 pending display portion 732, No. 3 pending display portion 733, and No. 4 pending display portion 734 sequentially switch the display state of the pending display portion corresponding to the occurrence of the pending memory using a predetermined time. Animate the pending display with .

The pending display unit corresponding to the occurrence of pending storage changes the display state 738 to the initial state and the display state 739 to the initial state.
is an intermediate state following the display state 738, and a display state 790 is a final state following the display state 739, and the display states are sequentially switched.

A display state 738 is a display state (initial display state) in which the segment display portions 731a and 731b are turned off. A display state 739 is a display state (intermediate display state) in which the segment display portion 731a is turned on and the segment display portion 731b is turned off. A display state 790 is a display state (final display state) in which the segment display portions 731a and 731b are lit.

In this way, the game machine 10 can perform the production of the pending display when the pending memory occurs. As a result, the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates the generation of the reserved memory to the player and enhances interest in the generation of the reserved memory.

Next, as one of the display effects using the symbols of the special game displayed in the symbol display area 700, the missing symbol effect that can be executed by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43. FIG. FIG. 41 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of the missing symbol effect of the third embodiment. Figure 42
[FIG. 2] is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of the missing symbol effect of the third embodiment. FIG. 43 is a diagram (No. 3) showing an example of the missing symbol effect of the third embodiment.

The symbol missing effect is a display effect in which part of the symbol of the special game is displayed missing. As described above, the 15 kinds of symbols of the special game have different display modes so as to be distinguishable from the other symbols even if one of the segment display portions 707 and 708 has a different lighting mode. It should be noted that the 15 types of symbols of the special game can be distinguished from other symbols even if any two of the segment display portions 707 and 708 have different lighting modes. Even if different, it can be easily distinguished from other patterns.

The symbol missing effect can give the player a sense of surprise and can arouse attention to the symbols. In addition, compared with the case of separately displaying a decorative element such as a character, the display data to be prepared does not become excessive, and the burden of display control is light.

A symbol 713 shown in FIG. 41(1) is a display state in which part of the symbol "3" of the special symbol game is not missing. The symbol 713 is suitable as the symbol "3" by turning on all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 at positions to be lit and turning off all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 at positions to be turned off. have discernment.

A symbol 713a shown in FIG. 41(2) is a display state in which one part of the symbol "3" of the special symbol game is missing. The pattern 713a is the segment display portion 707 at the position to be lit.
, 708 are turned on except for the segment display portion 741, and all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 at the position to be turned off are turned off. The segment display unit 741 displays the symbol "
By extinguishing the part that should be lit as the symbol "3", the partly missing display as the pattern "3" is produced. Although the pattern 713a is partially missing as the pattern "3", it has sufficient distinguishing power as the pattern "3".

A symbol 713b shown in FIG. 41(3) is a display state in which one part of the symbol "3" of the special symbol game is missing. The pattern 713b is the segment display portion 707 at the position where it should be lit.
, 708 are turned on except for the segment display portion 743, and all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 at the position to be turned off are turned off. The segment display unit 743 displays the symbol "
By extinguishing the part that should be lit as the symbol "3", the partly missing display as the pattern "3" is produced. Although the pattern 713b is partially missing as the pattern "3", it has sufficient distinguishing power as the pattern "3".

As shown in the pattern 713a and the pattern 713b, the gaming machine 10 can produce a partial loss display with different partial loss positions. In this case, the gaming machine 10 may produce a sense of anticipation for the game depending on which position the partially missing part is. For example, the game machine 10 is 1
In the matrix arrangement of 0 rows and 7 columns, the higher the missing position located in the upper left, the higher the expectation may be produced, and the lower the lower right, the lower the expectation may be produced. The anticipation of the game can produce a variety of anticipations regarding the game, for example, the anticipation of winning, the anticipation of the presence or absence of the general electric support, the anticipation of the reach production, and the like.

A symbol 713c shown in FIG. 41(4) is a display state in which a plurality (for example, two) of the symbols "3" of the special symbol game are partially lost. In the pattern 713c, all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 at positions to be lit are lit except for the segment display portions 744 and 745, and all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 at positions to be extinguished are extinguished. The segment display portions 744 and 745 produce a partially missing display as the symbol "3" by extinguishing the part that should be lit as the symbol "3". Although the pattern 713c is partially missing as the pattern "3", it has sufficient distinguishing power as the pattern "3".

As shown in the symbol 713c, the gaming machine 10 can produce partial loss display with different numbers of partial losses. In this case, the gaming machine 10 may produce a sense of anticipation for the game depending on the number of partial losses. For example, the gaming machine 10 may produce a higher sense of anticipation as the number of losses increases, and a lower expectation as the number of losses decreases, in a matrix arrangement of 10 rows and 7 columns.

Also, the gaming machine 10 may produce a sense of anticipation for the game by combining not only the number of partial losses but also the position of the partial losses. For example, the gaming machine 10 is arranged in a matrix arrangement of 10 rows and 7 columns to produce a high expectation as the deficit is concentrated in a specific position, and to produce a low expectation as the deficit is distributed over the whole. can be

A pattern 713d shown in FIG. 41(5) is a display mode that is a modification of the third embodiment.
It is displayed when the segment display portions 744 and 745 are in one of the two states of the transparent state and the non-transparent state (cherry blossom color). The pattern 713d is a display mode that can be realized by using a transflective LCD display device or an LCD display device instead of the display device 830. FIG. The pattern 713d is arranged in front of the background display 746 so that the background display 746 can be visually recognized from those of the segment display portions 744 and 745 that are in a transparent state.

The symbol 713d is a display state in which part of the symbol "3" of the special symbol game is not missing. The pattern 713d is displayed on the segment display portions 707 and 70 located at the position to be in the opaque state (cherry blossom color).
8 become opaque (cherry color), and all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 located at positions where they should be transparent become transparent. It has good discriminative power.

A symbol 713e shown in FIG. 41(6) is a display state in which one part of the symbol "3" (symbol 713d) of the special symbol game is missing. In the pattern 713e, all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 which should be in an opaque state (cherry blossom color) except for the segment display portion 747 are in an opaque state (cherry blossom color), and the segment display at a position which should be in a transparent state. Part 707
, 708 become transparent. The segment display section 747 produces a partially deficient display as the pattern "3" by changing the part that should be in the non-transparent state (cherry color) as the pattern "3" into the transparent state. The pattern 713e is a pattern "3" although it is partially missing as a pattern "3".
have sufficient discriminating power as Also, the pattern 713e expands the visible range of the background display 746 through the partial loss of the pattern "3". The pattern 713e may also have different positions and numbers of partial defects to produce a sense of anticipation for the game. Also, the pattern 713e may produce a sense of anticipation for the game by the display mode of the background display 746 viewed from the partially missing position. In such a case, the background display 746 may have a fixed display mode, or may change.

The pattern 713d shown in FIG. 41(5) is displayed when the segment display portions 744 and 745 are in one of the three states of transparent state, non-transparent state (white), and non-transparent state (cherry blossom). may be A symbol 713f shown in FIG. 41(7) is a special symbol game symbol "3
' (symbol 713d) is a display state in which one part is missing. In the pattern 713f, all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 which should be in an opaque state (cherry blossom color) except for the segment display portion 748 are in an opaque state (cherry blossom color), and the segment display at a position which should be in a transparent state. All of the portions 707 and 708 are in a transparent state. Segment display section 748
, where the pattern "3" should be in the opaque state (cherry color) becomes the opaque state (white), thereby producing a partially deficient display as the pattern "3". Although the pattern 713f is partially missing as the pattern "3", it has sufficient distinguishing power as the pattern "3". Also, design 713f
makes it easy to distinguish between the partially missing symbol “3” and the background display 746 . In addition, the design 713f
Also, the position and number of partial defects may be changed to produce a sense of anticipation for the game. also,
If there are two or more defects, the pattern 713f may be a combination of defects in the opaque state (white) and defects in the transparent state. In such a case, the pattern 713f may be arranged to produce a sense of anticipation for the game by differentiating a mixed state of missing in the opaque state (white) and missing in the transparent state.

A symbol 713g shown in FIG. 41(8) is a display state in which one part of the symbol "3" of the special symbol game is missing. In the pattern 713g, all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 which should be lit in cherry blossom color except for the segment display portion 749 are lit in cherry blossom color, and all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 which should be lit in cherry blossom color are turned off. . Segment display section 74
9 produces a partly missing display as the pattern "3" by flickering in the cherry color where the pattern "3" should be illuminated in cherry color. Although the pattern 713g is partially missing as the pattern "3", it has sufficient distinguishing power as the pattern "3". In addition, the segment display unit 749 displays the symbol "
Although it is assumed that the part that should be illuminated in cherry blossom color is flashed in cherry blossom color as the pattern "3", it may be possible to produce a partial loss as the pattern "3" by blinking or lighting in a color different from the cherry blossom color. In such a case, the pattern 713g may produce a sense of anticipation for the game by a blinking mode (blinking pattern, cycle, etc.) or lighting color. Also, the pattern 713g may produce a sense of anticipation for the game by a combination of the missing position and the number of missing pieces in addition to the flashing mode and lighting color.

A symbol 713h shown in FIG. 42(1) is a display state in which one part of the symbol "3" of the special symbol game is missing. The pattern 713h is the segment display portion 707 at the position where it should be lit.
, 708 are turned on, and all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 located at positions to be turned off, except for the segment display portion 750, are turned off. The segment display unit 750 displays the symbol "
By lighting the part that should be turned off as "3", a partially missing display (blank missing display, base missing display) as the pattern "3" is produced. Although the pattern 713h is partially missing as the pattern "3", it has sufficient distinguishing power as the pattern "3". From another point of view, the symbol 713h has sufficient recognizability as the symbol "3" although it is partially redundantly displayed as the symbol "3".

A symbol 713i shown in FIG. 42(2) is a display state in which one part of the symbol "3" of the special symbol game is missing. In the pattern 713i, all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 that should be lit in cherry blossom color are lit, and the segment display portion 707 that is to be turned off is lit in cherry blossom color.
, 708 except the segment display portion 751 are extinguished. Segment display section 75
1 produces a partially missing display (margin missing display, base missing display) as the pattern "3" by blinking in cherry blossom color where it should be turned off as the pattern "3". The symbol 713i is a symbol "3
, but it has sufficient recognizability as a pattern "3". From another point of view, the pattern 713i has sufficient recognizability as the pattern "3" although it is partially redundantly displayed as the pattern "3". The segment display unit 749 blinks in cherry blossom when the symbol "3" should be illuminated in cherry blossom.
” may be used to produce a partial loss.

A symbol 713j shown in FIG. 42(3) is a display state in which a plurality (for example, two) of the symbols "3" of the special symbol game are partially deficient. In the pattern 713j, all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 at positions to be lit except the segment display portion 753 are lit, and all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 at positions to be extinguished except the segment display portion 752 are lit. goes off. In the segment display portions 752 and 753, the parts that should be turned off as the symbol "3" are lit up, and the parts that should be lit up are turned off, so that the partly missing display as the symbol "3" (
lighting part missing display, extinguished part missing display). Although the pattern 713j is partially missing as the pattern "3", it has sufficient distinguishing power as the pattern "3". According to another point of view, the pattern 71
3j is a symbol "3", which is a mixture of the lit part missing display and the unlit part missing display as the pattern "3".
have sufficient discriminating power as

A symbol 713k shown in FIG. 42(4) is a display state in which a plurality (for example, two) of the symbols "3" of the special symbol game are partially missing. In the pattern 713k, all of the segment display portions 707 and 708 that should be lit in cherry blossom color except the segment display portion 755 are lit in cherry blossom color, and the segment display portions of the segment display portions 707 and 708 that are in the position to be turned off are lit in cherry blossom color. All except 754 are extinguished. The segment display portions 754 and 755 blink where they should be turned off as the pattern "3", and blink where they should be turned on, thereby partially missing display as the pattern "3" (lighted part missing display, lighted part missing display). directing. The symbol 713k is the symbol "3
, but it has sufficient recognizability as a pattern "3". From another point of view, the pattern 713k has a sufficient distinguishing power as the pattern "3", although the illuminated part missing display and the extinguished part missing display of the pattern "3" are mixed. Although the segment display portions 754 and 755 blink in cherry blossom color, they may be partially lost as the pattern "3" by blinking or lighting in a color different from the cherry blossom color.

A design 713m shown in FIG. 42(5) is a modification of the design 713j shown in FIG. 42(3). The pattern 713m can change the position of the segment display portion to be turned on at the position where it should be turned off. In the pattern 713m, the segment display portion 752 is the initial position of the segment display portion to be turned on at the position to be turned off.
708. As a result, the pattern 713m is produced such that the segment display portion that is lit at the position where it should be turned off is moved and displayed along the path 756. FIG. In the pattern 713m, by moving the segment display portion that lights up at the position that should be turned off to the segment display portion 753, the partial loss that lights up at the position that should be turned off and the partial loss that lights up at the position that should be turned off are offset. and design 713
(See FIG. 23 (1)). In this manner, the symbol 713m moves and displays the position of the non-lighting part display that is lit at the position where it should be lighted, or the position of the non-lighting part display that is lighted at the position that should be lighted. In such a case, the pattern 713m may produce a feeling of anticipation for the game by a movement path of the lighted part missing display or a movement path of the lighted part missing display.

A design 713n shown in FIG. 42(6) is a modification of the design 713m shown in FIG. 42(5). The symbol 713n is moved beyond the symbol display area to display the position of the non-lighting part display that is lit at the position where it should be lighted, or the position of the non-lighting part display that is lighted at the position that should be lighted. Design 7
13n moves and displays the segment display portion 752 that is to be turned off at the position to be turned off by a path 757 so as to move it out of the pattern display area, thereby correcting the lighting mode of the segment display portion 752 to turn off. Also, the pattern 713n is displayed by moving the segment display portion 753 which is turned off at the position where it should be lit and the segment display portion 758 which is turned on outside the pattern display area by a path 757 so as to move into the pattern display area. , the lighting state of the segment display portion 753 is corrected to lighting. In this manner, the symbol 713n moves and displays the position of the non-lighting part display that is lit at the position where it should be lighted, or the position of the non-lighting part display that is lighted at the position that should be lighted, moving beyond the pattern display area. In such a case, the pattern 713n may produce a sense of anticipation for the game by the moving route of the lighted portion missing display or the moving route of the lighted portion missing display.

The pattern 713p shown in FIG. 42(7) and the pattern 713q shown in FIG.
This is the temporary stop display mode shown in FIG. 23 (1). A pattern 713p shows a state in which the pattern 713 moves upward by one line within a pattern display area of a matrix of 10 rows and 7 columns, and a pattern 713q
It shows how the pattern 713 moves downward by one row in the pattern display area of 10 rows and 7 columns. The gaming machine 10 switches and displays the symbols 713p, 713, 713q, 713, .

At this time, the segment display portion 762 in the uppermost row 760 of the pattern 713p is partially missing. In addition, the segment display portion 763 in the bottom row 761 of the pattern 713q is partially missing. That is, the game machine 10 switches between the symbol 713 without partial defects and the symbols 713p and 713q with partial defects in the temporary stop operation of symbol "3".
The design 713 secures the distinguishing power as the design "3". As a result, the gaming machine 10
Even if the symbols 713p and 713q are partially lost until the symbols 713p and 713q lose their discriminating power to some extent, the temporary stop motion having the discriminating power as the symbol "3" is realized. In addition, the game machine 10 can call the player's attention to the symbols during the temporary stop by performing the partial loss effect at the partial timing of the temporary stop operation. Although the game machine 10 performs a partial loss effect at a partial timing of the temporary stop operation, the present invention is not limited to this, and may perform a partial loss effect at a partial timing for symbols that are displayed in a moving display or a deformed display. may

A left pattern area 704, a middle pattern display area 705, and a right pattern display area 706 shown in FIG. 43(1)
shows a ready-to-win display state in which the left and right symbols temporarily stop displaying the symbol "7" and the middle symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The symbol "7" displayed in the left symbol area 704 has a segment display portion 765 partially lost, and the symbol "7" displayed in the right symbol area 706 has a segment display portion 766 partially deleted. The segment display portion 765 and the segment display portion 766 have the same positional relationship in the pattern display area in a matrix of 10 rows and 7 columns. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform the missing symbol effect in a plurality of symbol areas, and can make the position and the number of the partial missing display corresponding to that case the same. Such a gaming machine 10 reduces the control processing load of the symbol loss effect.

A left pattern area 704, a middle pattern display area 705 and a right pattern display area 706 shown in FIG. 43(2)
shows a ready-to-win display state in which the left and right symbols temporarily stop displaying the symbol "7" and the middle symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The symbol "7" displayed by the left symbol area 704 is partially missing the segment display portion 765, and the symbol "7" displayed by the right symbol area 706 is partially missing the segment display portions 766,767. The segment display portions 765 and 766 have the same positional relationship in the pattern display area of a matrix of 10 rows and 7 columns. They do not have the same positional relationship in the display area. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can change the position and the number of the corresponding partially-defective display when the symbol-defective effect is performed in a plurality of symbol areas. In such a gaming machine 10, the symbols displayed in different symbol display areas can complement each other's distinguishability. In such a case, the gaming machine 10 may produce a sense of anticipation for the game by combining a plurality of symbol loss modes.

A left pattern area 704, a middle pattern display area 705 and a right pattern display area 706 shown in FIG. 43(3)
5 shows a state in which the left pattern and the middle pattern temporarily stop and display the pattern "7" and the right pattern temporarily stop and display the pattern "3". The symbol "7" displayed in the left symbol area 704 is displayed in the segment display portion 768 with the lit portion missing, the segment display portion 768 is moved and displayed along the path 769, and the segment display portion 770 is displayed with the unlit portion missing. The symbol "7" displayed in the middle symbol area 705 is displayed in the segment display portion 771 with the lit portion missing, the segment display portion 773 is displayed with the missing portion moved along the path 772, and the segment display portion 773 is displayed in the off portion missing.

Since the segment display portion 770 is outside the area of the left pattern area 704, it can be used as the decoration display portions 735, 736, and 737 in the reserved display area 701 and the segment display portions included in the decoration display areas 702 and 703. can.

In this manner, the left symbol area 704, the middle symbol display area 705, and the right symbol display area 706 can move and display the missing display part within each display area, and can move and display the missing display part beyond each display area.

A left pattern area 704, a middle pattern display area 705, and a right pattern display area 706 shown in FIG. 43(4)
5 shows a state in which the left pattern and the middle pattern temporarily stop and display the pattern "7" and the right pattern temporarily stop and display the pattern "3". The symbol "3" displayed in the right symbol display area 706 is displayed in the segment display portion 774 with the lighting portion missing, and the missing display portion is moved to the segment display portion 771 of the middle symbol display area 705 by a path 775 and displayed. As a result, the segment display portion 771 of the middle pattern display area 705
, the lighting part missing display is restored to a normal display mode.

In addition, the symbol "7" displayed in the middle symbol display area 705 restores the segment display part 773, which was displayed as missing in the extinguished part, to the normal display mode, and moves the missing display part to the left symbol area 70 by path 778.
4 segment display portion 768 is displayed. As a result, the segment display portion 773 of the middle symbol display area 705 is restored to the normal display mode of the extinguished part missing display, and the left symbol area 704 is restored.
segment display portion 768 restores the normal display mode of the extinguished portion missing display.

In this manner, the left symbol area 704, the middle symbol display area 705, and the right symbol display area 706 can move and display the missing display portion among the respective display areas. Also, the left design area 704 and the middle design display area 7
05 and the right symbol display area 706 are the same kind of symbols (for example, the left symbol "7" and the middle symbol "7").
) to move and display the missing display part, and to display different types of symbols (for example, the right symbol "3" and the middle symbol "
7”), the missing display portion can be moved and displayed.

Next, in the missing pattern effect of the modified example of the third embodiment, the segment display of the regular shape is lost by replacing the segment display, which is a part of the pattern, with a different shape display instead of the regular shape display. The missing symbol effect of the modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of a missing symbol effect in a modified example of the third embodiment.

The display device 830a is, for example, an LCD display device, and displays the pattern in segments on the LCD. The left design area 704a, the middle design display area 705a, and the right design display area 706a each display a design by a set of segment displays having a petal shape as a regular shape.

Such a display device 830a changes the shape of the segment display parts 780 and 781 and loses a part of the pattern. For example, the segment display portion 780 is different in size and lacks one petal-shaped segment display of the normal size. Moreover, the segment display section 781 changes the shape to a single flower shape, and eliminates one segment display of the petal shape, which is the normal shape.

The display device 830a can perform a missing rendering of a pending display in the pending display area 701a in the same way as the left symbol area 704a, the middle symbol display area 705a, and the right symbol display area 706a.

Next, description will be given of the lack effect of the pending display. Since the pending display is also displayed as a set of a plurality of segment displays in the same manner as the symbols, it is possible to perform a loss effect in which a part of the segment display is lost. First, the lack effect when the pending display occurs will be described with reference to FIG. 45 . FIG. 45 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of a loss effect when a hold display occurs according to the third embodiment.

As described with reference to FIG. 40, the gaming machine 10 performs a pending display generation animation when pending storage occurs. When the loss effect is not performed, the generated animation changes the display state 738 to the initial state, the display state 739 to the intermediate state following the display state 738, and the display state 790 to the display state 739 for the reserved display portion corresponding to the occurrence of the reserved memory. The display state is switched sequentially as the following final state.

On the other hand, in the case of performing a loss effect, the occurrence animation is, for the pending display portion corresponding to the occurrence of the pending memory, the display state 738 as the initial state, the display state 739 as the intermediate state following the display state 738, and the display state 791 as the display state. As the final state following 739, the display state is switched sequentially. Alternatively, the generation animation sequentially displays the display state 738 as the initial state, the display state 739 as the intermediate state following the display state 738, and the display state 792 as the final state following the display state 739 for the pending display portion corresponding to the occurrence of the pending memory. switch state.

A display state 790 is a display state (final display state) in which the segment display portions 731a and 731b are turned on, and is a display state without defects. A display state 791 is a display state (final display state) in which the segment display portion 731a is turned on and the segment display portion 731b is turned off, and is a display state with a partial defect. A display state 792 is a display state (final display state) in which the segment display portion 731a is turned off and the segment display portion 731b is turned on. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform the loss effect when the pending display occurs. In addition, since the game machine 10 can perform a loss effect in a different manner when the suspension display occurs, the expectation of the game may be produced according to the loss mode of the suspension display.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 has three final states (display state 79
0, 791, 792), it may be branched to three final states (display states 790, 791, 792) with intermediate states up to the display state 790. FIG. Also, the gaming machine 10
removes the intermediate states from the display state 738 which is the initial state, resulting in three final states (display state 79
0, 791, 792).

Here, loss effects in different developed forms will be described with reference to FIG. 28 . FIG. 46 shows the third
10 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a loss effect when a pending display occurs in the embodiment of FIG.
For example, in the missing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 46(1), the display state 738 is the initial state, the display state 739 is the intermediate state following the display state 738, and the display state 791 is the final state following the display state 739. FIG. Such an advanced form (defective pattern 1) does not include the display state 790 in which there is no defective display in the intermediate state, so it is possible to produce a strong sense of surprise.

46(2), the display state 738 is the initial state, the display state 739 is the intermediate state following the display state 738, the display state 790 is the intermediate state following the display state 739, and the display state 790 is the intermediate state following the display state 739. Let 791 be the final state following display state 790 . In such an advanced form (loss pattern 2), the display state 790, which is the intermediate state, can be held for a predetermined time, and the loss display effect can be performed with a time lag. can.

For example, in the missing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 46(3), the display state 738 is the initial state, the display state 739 is the intermediate state following the display state 738, and the display state 792 is the final state following the display state 739. FIG. Such an advanced form (defective pattern 3) does not include the display state 790 in which there is no defective display in the intermediate state, so it is possible to produce a strong sense of surprise.

46(4), the display state 738 is the initial state, the display state 739 is the intermediate state following the display state 738, the display state 790 is the intermediate state following the display state 739, and the display state 790 is the intermediate state following the display state 739. Let 792 be the final state following display state 790 . In such an advanced form (loss pattern 4), the display state 790, which is the intermediate state, can be held for a predetermined period of time, and the loss display effect can be performed with a time lag. can.

As described above, the game machine 10 can perform the loss performance in different development modes when the suspension display occurs, so that the expectation of the game is presented by the development mode up to the loss mode when the suspension display occurs. good too.

Next, the display mode of the hold display section will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of a hold display section according to the third embodiment; FIG. 47(1) shows the pending display area 70
1 shows that the number of pending memories of the special figure 1 game is "0" (special figure 1 pending 0) when the special figure 1 game is being displayed on hold. At this time, the pending display area 701 includes a No. 1 pending display portion 731, a No. 2 pending display portion 732, a No. 3 pending display portion 733, and a No. 4 pending display portion 733.
34 and decoration display portions 735, 736, and 737 are displayed in the off state.

FIG. 47 (2) shows that the number of pending memories of the special figure 1 game is "3" while the holding display of the special figure 1 game is being performed in the holding display area 701, and the third pending display is missing. It shows how it is (special figure 1 pending 3 (3rd missing)). At this time, the pending display area 701 displays the No. 1 pending display portion 731 and the No. 2 pending display portion 732 in the display state 790, and the No. 3 pending display portion 7
33 is displayed in the display state 791, and the No. 4 reserved display portion 734 and decoration display portions 735, 736, 7
37 are displayed in the off state.

A hold display area 701 in FIG. 47(3) shows a hold shift due to the start of fluctuation from the state in FIG. 47(2). Therefore, in FIG. 47 (3), the number of pending memories of the special figure 1 game is "2"
, and shows how the second pending display is missing (special figure 1 pending 2 (second missing)). At this time, the pending display area 701 displays the first pending display portion 731 in the display state 790,
The second reserved display portion 732 is displayed in a display state 791, and the third reserved display portion 733, the fourth reserved display portion 734, and the decorative display portions 736 and 737 are displayed in the off state. Note that the decoration display section 735
lights up in a display manner indicating that the variable display is in progress. In the pending display area 701, the decoration display portion 735 also serves as the pending digestion display instead of providing the pending digestion display indicating that the pending digestion is in progress.

A hold display area 701 in FIG. 47(4) shows a state in which a hold has occurred from the state shown in FIG. 47(3). Therefore, FIG. 47(4) shows that the number of pending memories of the special figure 1 game is "3", the second pending display is missing, and the third pending display is displaying the occurrence animation. (Special figure 1 pending 3 (2nd loss, 3rd occurrence animation)). At this time, the pending display area 701 displays the No. 1 pending display portion 731 in the display state 790, and the No. 2 pending display portion 7
32 and the No. 3 reserved display portion 733 are displayed in the display state 791, and the No. 4 reserved display portion 734 and the decorative display portion 736 are displayed in the off state. The decorative display section 735 lights up in a display mode indicating that the variable display is in progress, and the decorative display section 737 lights up in a display mode that indicates the pending occurrence. Reserved display area 7
In 01, the decorative display section 737 indicates that the pending is occurring, thereby guiding that the third pending display section 733 in which the pending is occurring is not confirmed as a missing display.

A pending display area 701 in FIG. 47(5) shows a state in which the generation animation performed in the state of FIG. 47(4) has ended. Therefore, FIG. 47 (5) shows that the number of pending memories of the special figure 1 game is "3", and the second pending display is missing (special figure 1 pending 3 (second missing)) . At this time, the pending display area 701 displays the No. 1 pending display portion 731 and the No. 3 pending display portion 733 in the display state 790, displays the No. 2 pending display portion 732 in the display state 791,
The No. 4 reservation display portion 734 and the decorative display portions 736 and 737 are displayed in the off state. Note that the decoration display portion 735 lights up in a display mode indicating that the variable display is being performed. The suspension display area 701 guides that the number 3 suspension display portion 733, which has been suspended due to the decoration display portion 737 being turned off, is not displayed in a missing state. Note that the No. 3 reservation display unit 733 may perform the missing display at different times such as during a shift.

FIG. 47(6) shows a state in which the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game is "1" when the reserved display of the special figure 2 game is performed in the reserved display area 701 (special figure 2 reservation 1). At this time, the pending display area 701 displays the No. 1 pending display portion 731 in the display state 790, the No. 2 pending display portion 732, the No. 3 pending display portion 733, the No. 4 pending display portion 734, and the decorative display portions 735 and 73.
7 are displayed in the off state. In addition, the decoration display unit 736 lights up in a display mode indicating that the special figure 2 game is displayed on hold. In the pending display area 701, a decoration display section 73 is provided instead of exclusively providing a distinguishing display for distinguishing the pending display of the special figure 1 game and the pending display of the special figure 2 game.
6 also serves as a distinguishing display.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can execute other effects (special effects) together with the loss effects when performing the loss effects of symbols and reserved displays. For example, the special effects include the movement display effect of the missing display part performed together with the missing pattern effect, and the decorative display part 735 along with the missing display effect of the pending display.
, 736, and 737, and the like. In addition, the special effects include effects related to the reserved display during the lacking effect of the symbols, effects related to the symbols during the missing effect of the suspended display, and the like. In addition, the special effects are a pattern display area 700, a reserved display area 701, and a decoration display area 702.
, 703, a petal-like segment display section, petals scattered and piled up, and other effects. In addition to other display effects performed by the display device 830 and the like, special effects include sound output effects performed by the sound output devices 19a and 19b and the like, operation effects performed using the push buttons 25 and the like, the board decoration device 46 and the like. There are a light-emitting effect performed using the frame decoration device 18 and the like, and a movable effect performed using the board effect device 44 and the like.

Next, as a modified example of the third embodiment, description will be made with reference to FIG. 48 about the loss effect for the pattern in which the outline is emphasized and ambiguous (non-emphasized) in the first embodiment. Figure 48 shows
It is a figure which shows the highlighting display of the outline of the pattern during loss|loss effect|action of the modification of 3rd Embodiment, and ambiguous (non-highlighting) display.

Fig. 48(1) shows the pattern widths and contour lines of decorative patterns A and B during loss production, and the thickness of the contour lines of decorative patterns A and B during loss production and the thickness of the contour line of the missing part. Fig. 48 (2) for comparison
shown in

Each of the decorative pattern A and the decorative pattern B can carry out a loss effect of losing a part of the pattern. For the decorative pattern A and the decorative pattern B, when the partial loss of the pattern results in the loss of the contour line, the contour line of the missing part is displayed corresponding to the partial loss of the pattern.

The decorative pattern A has a pattern width of w1, a number portion width of w2 (<w1), an outline width (thickness) of the number portion of w3 (<w2), and a missing portion outline thickness of w10. do. The decorative pattern B has a pattern width of w4, an outline width (thickness) of the pattern of w5 (<w4), and a missing portion outline thickness of w11.

The game machine 10 emphasizes the contour display of the number part of the decorative pattern A by making the width w3 of the contour line of the number part of the decorative pattern A larger than the width w5 of the contour line of the pattern of the decorative pattern B. The player can be made to feel that the contour display of the pattern B is ambiguous.

Further, the thickness w10 of the outline of the missing part is thinner than the width w3 of the outline of the number part of the decorative pattern A, so that the thickness of the width w3 of the outline of the number part of the decorative pattern A is assisted. be able to. In addition, since the thickness w11 of the outline of the missing part is thinner than the width w5 of the outline of the decorative pattern B, it is possible to assist the perception of the thickness of the width w5 of the outline of the decorative pattern B. can.

Further, since the outline thickness w10 of the missing part is thicker than the width w3 of the outline of the number part of the decorative pattern A, it is possible to assist the feeling of the missing part of the number part of the decorative pattern A. Further, since the thickness w11 of the outline of the missing part is thicker than the width w5 of the outline of the decorative design B, it is possible to assist the feeling of the defect of the design of the decorative design B. - 特許庁

In addition, the gaming machine 10 sets the outline thickness w10 of the missing part of the decorative symbol A and the thickness w11 of the missing part outline of the decorative symbol B to be the same, so that the width of the outline of the numerical part of the decorative symbol A is It can be used as a reference for perceiving the width w3 or the width w5 of the outline of the decorative design B.

Also, in the gaming machine 10, the thickness w10 of the outline of the missing part of the decorative symbol A and the thickness w11 of the outline of the missing part of the decorative symbol B may be different. In this case, the gaming machine 10 sets the missing outline thickness w10 of the decorative symbol A to the symbol width w1, the numeral width w2, or the numeral outline width w3.
It may be determined according to the ratio or the difference between. In addition, the gaming machine 10 has a decorative pattern B
The missing portion outline thickness w11 may be determined according to the ratio or difference between the symbol width w4 or the outline width w5 of the symbol.

In addition, the game machine 10 varies the size of the missing portion outline thickness w10 of the decorative pattern A, and guides the expectation of the game according to the size of the missing portion outline thickness w10 of the decorative pattern A. can be anything. In addition, the game machine 10 varies the size of the missing portion outline thickness w11 of the decorative pattern B, and guides the expectation of the game according to the size of the missing portion outline thickness w11 of the decorative pattern B. can be anything.

Further, the missing portion outline thickness w10 of the decorative pattern A and the missing portion outline thickness w11 of the decorative pattern B may be always fixed, but may be switched according to the variable display state. can be anything. for example,
Emphasizing the outline display of the number part of the decorative design A and de-emphasizing the outline display of the design of the decorative design B are
It may be always fixed, or it may be switchable according to the variable display state. From the viewpoint of facilitating the perception of non-emphasis of outline display, it is desirable that the thickness w10 of the outline of the missing part of the decorative pattern A and the thickness w11 of the outline of the missing part of the decorative pattern B are fixed.

The non-emphasis of the outline display of the number part of the decorative design A and the emphasis of the outline display of the design of the decorative design B are
It may be always fixed, or it may be switchable according to the variable display state. From the viewpoint of facilitating the perception of emphasis on the contour display of the pattern, it is desirable that the thickness w10 of the missing part outline of the decorative pattern A and the thickness w11 of the missing part outline of the decorative pattern B are fixed.

Next, a more detailed modification of the display mode of the decorative symbols A and B during temporary stop display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop display using a decorative symbol during loss effect in a modified example of the third embodiment. It should be noted that the same reference numerals may be used for the same configuration as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof may be omitted.

FIG. 49(1) shows the temporary stop display mode of the symbol 527 as an example of the decorative symbol A during the temporary stop display while performing the loss effect. The temporary stop display modes of the pattern 527 are (a), (b), (
c) and (d) are repeated periodically.

The pattern 527 during the temporary stop display has the background portion 527d fixed, and the number portion 527n having the identifiability as the pattern 527 while being partly missing swings in the horizontal direction (first temporary stop operation). While doing so, it expands and contracts in the vertical direction (second temporary stop operation).

The numerical portion 527n expands and contracts in the vertical direction while rocking in the horizontal direction while fixing the relative position, the relative size, and the (relative) thickness w10 of the outline of the missing portion. The numeric part 527n includes the absolute position, the absolute size, and the (absolute) thickness w10 of the outline of the missing portion.
is fixed, and it expands and contracts vertically while swinging horizontally. Here, "relatively" refers to the relationship between the number portion 527n and the missing portion, and "absolutely" refers to the relationship between the display area of the display device 830 and the display position of the missing portion.

In addition, the numeric part 527n may change at least one of the position, the size, and the thickness w10 of the outline of the missing portion to perform the temporary stop display (third temporary stopping operation).
In addition, instead of expanding and contracting in the vertical direction while swinging in the horizontal direction, the number portion 527n
The temporary stop operation may be performed by varying at least one of the position and size of the missing portion and the thickness w10 of the outline of the missing portion.

FIGS. 49(2) and (3) show the temporary stop display mode of the symbol 537 as an example of the decorative symbol B during the temporary stop display while performing the loss effect. The temporary stop display mode of the pattern 537 is (a)
, (b), (c), and (d) are repeated periodically. The pattern 537 during the temporary stop display swings in the vertical direction while part of the pattern 537 is missing.

In the pattern 537, at least one of the position and size of the missing portion and the thickness w11 of the outline of the missing portion may be changed to perform temporary stop display. In addition, the pattern 537 performs a temporary stop operation by varying at least one of the position, size, and outline thickness w11 of the missing portion instead of swinging in the vertical direction. There may be.

In addition, the decorative pattern B during the temporary stop display while performing the loss effect shown in FIG. 49 (2) is
This is a display mode in which the relative position of the missing portion is fixed (not variable) with respect to the pattern 537, and a display mode in which the absolute position is variable (not fixed) with respect to the display area of the display device 830. FIG. In such a missing display, the pattern 537 and the missing portion can be displayed integrally, and by swinging the pattern 537, the display range on the rear side facing the missing portion can be enlarged.

In addition, the decorative pattern B in which the temporary stop display is being performed while performing the loss effect shown in FIG. 49 (3),
This is a display mode in which the relative position of the missing part with respect to the pattern 537 is variable (not fixed), and a display mode in which the absolute position is fixed (not variable) with respect to the display area of the display device 830 . Such a missing display can be displayed without a sense of unity between the pattern 537 and the missing part, and can fix the display range on the rear side facing the missing part even if the pattern 537 swings.

Next, as a modified example of the third embodiment, application of loss effect to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment in which the thickness of the outline display can be changed for each part of the decorative pattern will be described with reference to FIG. explain. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop mode of the decorative symbols during the missing effect in the modified example of the third embodiment.

FIG. 50(1) shows a partly missing "7" (symbol 537) of the decorative pattern B shown in FIG. A pattern 550 shows a state in which "7" of the decorative pattern B is rotated counterclockwise on the vertical axis by a predetermined angle. A pattern 551 shows a state in which "7" of the decorative pattern B is viewed from the front. A pattern 552 shows a state in which "7" of the decorative pattern B is rotated rightward on the vertical axis by a predetermined angle. for example,
The game machine 10 can perform temporary stop display by switching from the pattern 550 to the pattern 551 to the pattern 552 and from the pattern 552 to the pattern 551 to the pattern 550 .

At this time, as shown in FIG. 50(2), the gaming machine 10 can switch the thickness (degree of emphasis) of the contour display for each switching target contour display portion (left half of the pattern, right half of the pattern). .
Also, the gaming machine 10 can switch the thickness (emphasis level) of the missing portion outline display, as shown in FIG. 50(2).

The gaming machine 10 uses the left half of the pattern 550 as the left portion 550L, and the right half of the pattern 550 as the right portion 550L.
50R, the contour display of the left part 550L that seems to move away is displayed thinly (non-highlighted display, ambiguous display), and the contour display of the right part 550R that seems to move in the approaching direction and the missing part contour are displayed. Display the display in bold (highlighted). In other words, the gaming machine 10 displays the contour display of the left portion 550L, which appears farther than the right portion 550R, thinner than the contour display of the right portion 550R and the outline display of the missing portion, and displays the contour display of the right portion 550R, which appears closer than the left portion 550L. The contour display and the missing portion contour display are displayed thicker than the contour display of the left portion 550L.

Further, when the left half of the pattern 551 is the left portion 551L and the right half of the pattern 551 is the right portion 551R, the gaming machine 10 displays the outline of the left portion 551L, the outline of the right portion 551R, and the outline of the missing portion. is the standard thickness (standard display). In other words, the gaming machine 10 displays the contour display of the left portion 551L, the contour display of the right portion 551R, and the missing portion contour display, which appear at approximately the same depth position, with the same thickness (standard thickness).

Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the left half of the pattern 552 is the left portion 552L and the right half of the pattern 552 is the right portion 552R, the contour display of the left portion 552L that appears to move in the approaching direction is thickened (highlighted). ), and the contour display of the right portion 552R that seems to move away and the contour display of the missing portion are thinly displayed (non-highlighted display, ambiguous display). In other words, the gaming machine 10
shows the contour display of the right portion 552R, which is farther than the left portion 552L, and the contour display of the missing portion.
The contour display of the left portion 552L, which appears to be closer than the right portion 552R and the defect portion contour display, is displayed thicker than the contour display of the right portion 552R.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can easily grasp the temporary stop display state of the decorative symbols and the lack effect. The left part or the right part of the pattern may be uniformly highlighted or non-emphasized, but the degree of emphasis or non-emphasis is changed according to the distance from the vertical axis (central axis). You may do so.

In addition, in the temporary stop display state of the decorative symbols, the gaming machine 10 may divide one defect display into two regions and control the thickness of the defect outline display in each region.
More than one defect display may be performed, and the thickness of the defect outline display may be controlled by each defect display. For example, the gaming machine 10 thins the missing part outline display (non-highlighted display, Ambiguous display) is displayed, and the outline of the defect is displayed thickly (emphasized) for the right defect (the right region when one defect is divided into two, or the right defect of two defects). In addition, the gaming machine 10 sets the missing part contour display to the standard thickness for the left missing part and the right missing part of the pattern 551 (standard display). Also, game machine 1
At 0, the missing part outline display of the left missing part of the pattern 552 is displayed thick (highlighted), and the missing part outline of the right missing part is thinned (non-highlighted display, ambiguous display).

Further, the gaming machine 10 may display the outline of the missing portion without displaying the outline in the temporary stop display state of the decorative symbols.
In addition, the gaming machine 10 may display the outline of the missing portion with thickness in the depth direction in the temporary stop display state of the decorative symbols. The thickness of the outline display of the missing portion may be controlled. For example, the game machine 10 displays the missing part outline display thin (non-highlighted display, ambiguous display) for the front side of the deep missing part of the pattern 550, and displays the thick (highlighted) missing part outline display behind the deep missing part. do. In addition, the gaming machine 10 sets the missing part contour display to the standard thickness (standard display) for the front side of the deep missing part and the back side of the deep missing part of the pattern 551 . In addition, the game machine 10 displays the missing part outline display thicker (highlighted display) in front of the deep missing part of the pattern 552, and thins the missing part outline display behind the deep missing part (non-highlighted display, ambiguous display). .

Note that the gaming machine 10 may perform a loss effect for the message effect in the variable display game described with reference to FIG. can do. At this time, game machine 1
0 can control the position, number, size, and outline thickness of missing parts for message display.

The gaming machine 10 (including modifications) of the third embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 displays display elements (for example, special symbols, pending display) related to the game (for example, special figure 1 game, special figure 2 game) to produce the game. First effect means (for example, A game control device 100a that performs a loss effect, a performance control device 300, and a display device 83
0) and a second effect means capable of directing the game in a different effect mode from the first effect means (for example, the game control device 100a that performs a special effect, the effect control device 300
, display device 830), and the first rendering means, when displaying the display elements, displays all of the display elements (for example, the pattern 713, the display state 790 of the pending display), and the display elements can be displayed in a second state (for example, a pattern 713a, a display state 791 of a pending display) in which a part of is missing (see FIGS. 41 and 47).

(2) The gaming machine 10 displays display elements (for example, special symbols, pending display) related to the game (for example, special figure 1 game, special figure 2 game) to produce the game. First effect means (for example, A game control device 100a that performs a loss effect, a performance control device 300, and a display device 83
0) and a second effect means capable of directing the game in a different effect mode from the first effect means (for example, the game control device 100a that performs a special effect, the effect control device 300
, display device 830), and the first rendering means, when displaying a display element as an assembly of two or more display components (for example, segment display units 707 and 708 that are lit), display configuration A first state that displays display elements by all of the elements (e.g., graphic 71
3, a display state of pending display 790) and a second state in which display elements are displayed with a part of the display component missing (for example, a pattern 713a, a display state of pending display 791) (
41 and 47).

(3) The display element (1) or (2) is a pattern that is variably displayed in the game (
41 to 43).
(4) The display element (1) or (2) is a pending display that displays the right to execute the game in the game (see FIGS. 45 to 47).

(5) The gaming machine 10 exclusively executes the first game (for example, special figure 1 game) and the second game (for example, special figure 2 game) at a predetermined execution time (for example, variable display time) An executable control unit (for example, game control device 100a, effect control device 300) is provided. The control unit determines the execution time of the first game based on the sum of the number of stored rights to execute the first game and the number of stored rights to execute the second game (see FIG. 35).

(6) The control unit in (5) increases the execution time of the first game as the total value of the number of stored rights to execute the first game and the number of stored rights to execute the second game increases. (See FIG. 35).

(7) The control unit in (5) sets the expected execution time of the first game as the sum of the number of stored rights to execute the first game and the number of stored rights to execute the second game increases. Decide so that the value is large (see FIG. 35).

(8) The gaming machine 10 exclusively executes the first game (for example, special figure 1 game) and the second game (for example, special figure 2 game) at a predetermined execution time (for example, variable display time) An executable control unit (for example, game control device 100a, effect control device 300) is provided. The control unit determines the execution time of the first game based on the number of stored rights to execute the first game and the number of stored rights to execute the second game, and sets the execution time of the second game to: The decision is made based only on the number of stored rights to execute the second game, regardless of the number of rights to execute the first game stored (see FIG. 35).

(9) The maximum number of stored rights to execute the second game in (5) to (8) is smaller than the maximum number of stored rights to execute the first game (see FIG. 31).
(10) The maximum number of stored execution rights for the second game in (9) is 1 (see FIG. 31).
.

[Fourth embodiment]
In the description of the gaming machines of the first to third embodiments, the game board 30 (see FIG. 2)
, or a game machine having a game board 800 (see FIG. 28), the game machine of the fourth embodiment can be applied to any of them. It should be noted that the same reference numerals may be used for the same configurations as those of the first to third embodiments, and descriptions thereof may be omitted.

The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment can prevent the game effect from becoming redundant after the advance notice by informing the result of the variable display game earlier by the notice notice, and reduce the loss of interest.

First, among the variable display commands prepared by the gaming machine 10, three variable display commands (variable display commands A, B, and C) that are capable of giving advance notice and have different variable display times will be described. First, the variation display command A that enables the winning to be derived in a relatively short time will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command A of the fourth embodiment.

The variable display command A is one of variable display commands that the game control device 100 transmits to the effect control device 300 . In addition, the game control device 100 may transmit a stop symbol command, a pending display command, etc. together with the variable display command. The variable display command A is a command corresponding to the variable display effect of the variable time T0.

The effect control device 300 receives the variable display command A, generates a variable display effect for the variable time T0, and executes the variable display effect in a required effect device. The variable display command A has an aspect that the variation time is short, so that the time is not enough to perform various effects, but it also has an aspect that the time to derive the result is fast.

The effect control device 300 executes the first half variation and the second half variation within the variation time T0. The first-half variation is a mode of presentation common to a plurality of variation display commands, and is responsible for, for example, until a symbol that has been stopped and displayed is variably displayed at a predetermined speed. The second-half variation is a production mode that differs for each variation display command, and includes, for example, a ready-to-win production and the like, and is responsible for symbol stoppage. The fluctuation display command A allocates the time T01 of the fluctuation time T0 to the first half fluctuation and the time T02 to the second half fluctuation. Note that the time T01 is shorter than the time T02.

The second half variation of the variation display command A includes an advance notice effect at time T021, a ready-to-win effect at time T022, and a short SP (special) ready-to-win effect at time T023. The preview performance is
This is an effect that announces the result of the variable display game with a predetermined degree of reliability. For example, the notice effect is a final notice (actual notice) effect that announces the confirmation of the big hit, a high reliability notice effect that announces the big hit with high reliability compared to the low reliability notice effect, and a high reliability notice There is a low-reliability advance notice effect that notifies a big hit with a lower reliability than the effect. It should be noted that the advance notice effect may be one that gives advance notice of the value of the win and the effect mode of the process of deriving the win.

The ready-to-win effect is the effect of the variable display process of the variable display game. Short SP reach production is one form of development reach that develops from normal reach, and produces reach with a medium degree of expectation.

Note that the variable display command A is for deriving a hit as a result of the short SP ready-to-win effect, and the gaming machine 10 prepares a command for deriving a loss as a result separately from the variable display command A.

Next, variable display command B that can derive a win in a longer time than variable display command A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to variable display command B of the fourth embodiment.

The variable display command B is one of variable display commands that the game control device 100 transmits to the effect control device 300 . The variable display command B is a command corresponding to a variable display effect with a variable time T1 (>T0).

The effect control device 300 receives the variable display command B, generates a variable display effect for the variable time T1, and executes the variable display effect in a required effect device. Since the variable display command B has a longer variable time than the variable display command A, the variable display command B has an aspect that it can perform various effects than the variable display command A, but it takes more time to derive the result than the variable display command A. It also has the aspect of being slow.

The effect control device 300 executes the first half variation and the second half variation within the variation time T1. The variation display command B allocates time T11 (=T01) of the variation time T1 to the first half variation, and allocates time T12 (>T02) to the second half variation. Note that the time T11 is shorter than the time T12.

When the second half variation of the variation display command B includes a notice effect at time T121, a ready-to-win effect at time T122, and a long SP ready-to-win effect at time T123 (effect pattern B01);
Advance notice effect at time T121, reach effect at time T122, and time T124 (=T023)
There is a case (effect pattern B02) including a short SP ready-to-win effect and a winning effect during fluctuation at time T125.

Long SP reach production is a form of development reach that develops from normal reach, and produces reach with high expectations. The hit-probability-during-variation presentation presents that the win is fixed before the variation display result is derived. The winning effect during fluctuation may be, for example, a fanfare effect performed during fluctuation, or a lottery effect such as pattern, probability change, general electric support, and the like. Also, the hit probability effect during fluctuation may be a freezing effect, a lively effect, or the like, and may also display the remaining time of the change. It should be noted that the hit probability effect during variation may be performed by displaying the symbols as the result of the variation display, or may be performed by turning down the symbols as the result of the variation display. Even in the case where the winning probability effect during fluctuation is performed with the pattern as the result of the variable display face down, the pattern as the result of the changing display is displayed by the end of the winning probability effect during the fluctuation.

The performance control device 300 can selectively execute the performance pattern B01 and the performance pattern B02 when receiving the variable display command B, and when executing the hit performance in the advance notice performance, the performance pattern B02 is executed rather than the performance pattern B01. makes it easier to select

A game machine 10 makes it easy to select a performance pattern B02 capable of announcing the result prior to the performance pattern B01 because there is little contribution to the improvement of interest even if the expectation is aroused in the performance after the execution of the fixed advance notice performance. . As a result, the game machine 10 prevents the game performance after the advance notification from becoming redundant and causing a decrease in interest, and enables the game performance after the result is determined even during the variable display, thereby improving the interest. .

In this way, the game machine 10 can make the game effect after the advance notice non-redundant by the amount that the time T124 of the short SP reach effect is shorter than the time T123 of the long SP reach effect. In addition, the game machine 10 can allocate the time T125 of the hit certain effect during fluctuation to the effect after the win is confirmed.

In addition, the game machine 10 guides the game result by the same short SP ready-to-win effect as in the variable display command A in the variable display command B whose variable time is longer than the variable display command A,
A non-redundant game progress can be realized by allocating the winning effect during fluctuation to the surplus time.

The variable display command B is for deriving a win as a result of a short SP reach effect or a result of a long SP reach effect. Prepare separately.

Next, variable display command C that can derive a win in a longer time than variable display command B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command C of the fourth embodiment.

The variable display command C is one of variable display commands that the game control device 100 transmits to the effect control device 300 . The variable display command C is a command corresponding to a variable display effect with a variable time T2 (>T0, T1).

The effect control device 300 receives the variable display command C, generates a variable display effect for the variable time T2, and executes the variable display effect in a required effect device. Since the variable display command C has a longer variable time than the variable display commands A and B, the variable display command C has an aspect that it can perform more various effects than the variable display commands A and B. It also has the aspect that the time to derive the result is slow.

The effect control device 300 executes the first half variation and the second half variation during the variation time T2. The change display command C allocates time T21 (=T01, T11) of the change time T2 to the first half change, and allocates time T22 (>T02, T12) to the second half change. Note that time T21
is shorter than time T22.

The second half variation of the variable display command C includes a notice effect at time T221, a ready-to-win effect at time T222, and a short SP reach-through-long SP reach effect at time T223 (effect pattern C01), and a notice effect at time T221. There is also a case (effect pattern C02) including a ready-to-win effect at time T222, a short SP ready-to-reach effect at time T224 (=T023), and a hit-while-fluctuation effect at time T225 (>T125).

Short SP reach to long SP reach production is one form of development reach that develops from normal reach, and produces reach with high expectations from short SP reach to long SP reach.

The performance control device 300 can selectively execute the performance pattern C01 and the performance pattern C02 when the variable display command C is received, and when the hit performance is executed in the advance notice performance, the performance pattern C02 is executed rather than the performance pattern C01. makes it easier to select

A game machine 10 makes it easy to select a performance pattern C02 capable of announcing the result prior to the performance pattern C01 because there is little contribution to the enhancement of interest even if the expectation is aroused in the performance after the execution of the fixed advance notice performance. . As a result, the game machine 10 prevents the game performance after the advance notification from becoming redundant and causing a decrease in interest, and enables the game performance after the result is determined even during the variable display, thereby improving the interest. .

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can make the game effect after the advance notification non-redundant by the amount that the time T224 of the short SP reach effect is shorter than the time T223 of the long SP reach effect via the short SP reach. In addition, the game machine 10 is changed during the time T225 of the hit probability effect.
Only can be assigned to the production after the hit is confirmed.

In addition, the game machine 10 guides the game result by the short SP ready-to-win effect similar to the variable display command A in the variable display command C whose variable time is longer than the variable display command A,
A non-redundant game progress can be realized by allocating the winning effect during fluctuation to the surplus time.

The variable display command C is for deriving a win as a result of short SP reach performance or as a result of long SP reach performance via short SP reach. It is prepared separately from the display command C.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 uses the variable display commands A, B, and C to obtain a hit as a result of the short SP reach effect by the variable display command A and a result of the long SP reach effect by the variable display command B. A hit, a hit as a result of a long SP reach performance via a short SP reach by a variable display command C, and a hit as a result of a short SP reach performance accompanied by a hit accuracy performance during variation by the variable display commands B, C are realized. .

The fluctuation pattern table described with reference to FIG. 2 is a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), reach state Tables (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern before becoming, are included. The first half fluctuations in the fluctuation display commands A, B, and C may correspond to the effect contents selected in the first half fluctuation group table, the first half fluctuation pattern selection table, or the like. Further, the second half variation in the variation display commands A, B, and C may correspond to the content of the effect selected from the second half variation group table, the second half variation pattern selection table, or the like.

In addition, in the variable display commands A, B, and C, the first half variation is a common production mode in a plurality of variable display commands, and for example, it is assumed that the symbols that are stopped and displayed are variable and displayed at a predetermined speed. In addition, it may be responsible for up to a predetermined production break, such as until it becomes.

Next, display screens during a game corresponding to variable display commands A, B, and C will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 58. FIG. FIG. 54 shows an example of a display screen during a game according to the fourth embodiment (
1). FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the fourth embodiment (Part 2
). FIG. 56 is a diagram (No. 3) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 57 is a diagram (part 4) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 58 is a diagram (No. 5) showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the fourth embodiment.

A display screen 600 shown in FIG. 54(1) is a display screen in which symbols are stopped. It is used for period stop display. The display screen 600 includes a large pattern group 501, a small pattern group 502, a special figure 1 reserved number display 503, a special figure 2 reserved number display 504, a reserved display (holding standby display) 505, and a reserved digestion display 506. display.

In the display screen 600, the left symbol indicates that the symbol is stopped at "3", and the middle symbol indicates that
It shows that the symbol is stopped at "5", and the right symbol shows that the symbol is stopped at "7". That is, the large symbol group 501 on the display screen 600 indicates that the special symbol variation display game is in a stopped state (symbols are stopped). On the display screen 600, the left, middle and right symbols forming the small symbol group 502 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in a stopped state.

The special figure 1 reserved number display 503 displays the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game. On the display screen 600, the special figure 1 reserved number display 503 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game is "3".
The special figure 2 reserved number display 504 displays the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game. In the display screen 600, the special figure 2 reserved number display 504 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game is "0". The pending display 505 performs a pending display corresponding to the number of pending memories of the special figure 1 game or the number of pending memories of the special figure 2 game according to the gaming state. On the display screen 600, the pending display 505 is the special figure 1
Three pending icons 507 are displayed corresponding to the number of pending memories of the game.

The pending digestion display 506 can indicate whether or not the special figure variable display game is in a variable display state and inform the degree of expectation for the game result by its display mode. On the display screen 600, the pending digestion display 506 has a blank (blank) inside the frame to indicate that the special figure variation display game is in a stopped state. Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 starts variable display corresponding to variable display command A, variable display command B, or variable display command C, for example.

A display screen 602 shown in FIG. 54(2) is a display screen after the start of the variable display, and is a display screen corresponding to the first half variation common to the variable display commands A, B, and C. FIG. The display screen 602 is
It is a screen after the display screen 600 and shows a screen during variable display (during three-pattern variation). On the display screen 602, the left, medium and right symbols of the large symbol group 501 are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure fluctuation display game is being fluctuated. Also, on the display screen 602, the small pattern group 502
The left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure fluctuation display game is in the process of fluctuation display.

On the display screen 602, the special figure 1 reserved number display 503 indicates that the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game is "2".
, the special figure 2 reserved number display 504 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game is "0", and the reserved display 505 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game is "2" indicates that In addition, on the display screen 602, a pending digestion display 506 displays a pending digestion icon 508 (holding memory display during digestion), indicating that the special figure variation display game is being displayed in variation.

A display screen 604 shown in FIG. 54(3) is a display screen corresponding to the second half variation, and is a display screen (part 1) corresponding to the advance notice effect among the second half variations common to the variation display commands A, B, and C. .

The display screen 604 includes a pre-suggestion effect display 520 in its display contents. A display screen 604 is a display screen in a state where a prior suggestion effect is being performed when the left symbol of the large symbol group 501 is temporarily stopped. The pre-suggestion effect display 520 displays an image simulating a push button (effect button 25) and characters "Ready?" is suggested (notified) in advance.

A display screen 606 shown in FIG. 55(1) is a display screen (part 2) corresponding to the advance notice effect following the display screen 604 . The display screen 606 includes a suggestion effect acceptance display 523 in its display contents.
The suggestive effect acceptance display 523 displays an image simulating a push button and the characters "Press!" to guide that it is time to accept the push button operation. In addition, the suggestion effect acceptance display 523 displays a gauge for the acceptable time for push button operation.

Display screen 608 shown in FIG. 55(2), display screen 610 shown in FIG. 55(3), and FIG.
A display screen 612 shown in 6(1) is displayed when a push button operation is received.
It is a display screen for notifying the result of the variable display game. Note that the gaming machine 10 may not notify the result of the variable display game if the push button operation is not accepted within the acceptable time of the push button operation, or the acceptable time of the push button operation may expire. , the result of the variable display game may be announced. When the gaming machine 10 waits for the end of the push button operation acceptable time to give notice of the result of the variable display game, compared to the case of accepting the push button operation and giving notice of the result of the variable display game, You may make it reduce the appearance rate of the notice with high expectation.

A display screen 608 is a display screen (part 3) corresponding to the announcement effect following the display screen 606 . The display screen 608 includes an advance notification display 609 in its display contents. The advance notification display 609 is
A cut-in display that overlaps the large pattern group 501 includes a tiger-like character and the words "Chance!". The advance notice display 609 is a notice effect display that suggests that there is a possibility of winning even though the degree of expectation is low as a result of the variable display game, and is a form of non-fixed notice effect that does not announce the confirmation of the win. Among them, it is one form of the low-reliability foretelling effect.

A display screen 610 is a display screen (part 4) corresponding to the advance notice effect following the display screen 606 . The display screen 610 includes an advance notification display 611 in its display contents. The advance notification display 611 is
A cut-in display that overlaps the large pattern group 501 includes a character like a tiger wearing sunglasses and the words "hot!". The advance notification display 611 is an advance notice effect display that suggests that the degree of expectation for winning is high as a result of the variable display game, and is a form of non-fixed advance notice effect that does not notify the determination of the win. is a form of The cut-in display of the advance notice display 611 is displayed larger than the cut-in display of the advance notice display 609, suggesting a high degree of reliability.

A display screen 612 is a display screen (No. 5) corresponding to the announcement effect following the display screen 606 . The display screen 612 includes an advance notification display 613 in its display contents. The advance notification display 613 is
A cut-in display overlapping the large pattern group 501 includes a pig-like character and a message tape "Congratulations!". The advance notice display 613 is an advance notice effect display suggesting that a win has been confirmed as a result of the variable display game, and is one form of a confirmation notice effect for notifying that the win has been confirmed. Note that the cut-in display of the advance notice display 613 is similar to the advance notice display 60.
A larger display than the cut-in display of 9,611 suggests a higher degree of reliability.

A display screen 614 shown in FIG. 56(2) is a display screen after the advance notice effect, and is a display screen corresponding to the ready-to-win effect common to the variable display commands A, B, and C. A display screen 614 shows a screen during variable display (during three-symbol variation). The display screen 614 indicates that the left and right symbols of the large symbol group 501 are temporarily stopped with the symbol "3" displayed, and the medium symbol is in a ready-to-win state.
The display screen 614 produces a so-called normal reach. In the normal reach, although a win is rarely derived as a result of the variable display game, a loss is derived in many cases. The reach corresponding to the variable display command A, the variable display command B, or the variable display command C is a connection performance of the advanced reach.

A display screen 616 shown in FIG. 56(3) is a display screen after the ready-to-win effect, and is a display screen for the short SP ready-to-win effect developed from the ready-to-win effect. The short SP reach performance is positioned as a so-called low-reliability development reach, and the low-reliability development reach is performed in a relatively short performance time. For example, the short SP ready-to-win effect produces a higher expectation than the normal ready-to-win game by varying the medium pattern in a manner different from that of the normal ready-to-win game. In the game machine 10, in the reach performance (normal reach, short SP reach, long SP reach, etc.) or other performances, the symbols during variable display are the same as those in the first embodiment, the second embodiment,
An effect of changing the thickness of the outline as described in the third embodiment, or an effect of losing part of the pattern may be performed.

A display screen 618 shown in FIG. 57(1) is a display screen after the ready-to-win effect, and is a display screen for the long SP ready-to-win effect developed from the ready-to-win effect. The long SP reach production is positioned as a so-called highly reliable development reach, and produces a highly reliable development reach in a relatively long production time. For example, in the long SP reach effect, the success or failure of the battle effect performed with the large symbol group 501 hidden indicates the suitability of the result of the game.
Produce a sense of expectation that is higher than reach.

The gaming machine 10 produces short SP reach and long SP reach via normal reach, but it also produces two-step development reach that develops into long SP reach via short SP reach via normal reach and short SP reach. can.

A display screen 620 shown in FIG.
This is the display screen of the hitting performance during variation after the P reach performance. The display screen 620 displays the large pattern group 501
, the pattern "3" of three pairs, which is a winning mode, is temporarily stopped and displayed. In addition, the three-matched pattern "3"
is an example of a winning mode. In addition, the display screen 620 includes a winning effect display 621 in its display contents. The winning performance display 621 displays a performance image including the characters "Congratulations!" The display screen 620 secures a display area for the winning effect display 621 by moving and displaying the large symbol group 501 to the corner. In addition, the display screen 620 displays the large symbol group 501 in a reduced size to secure a display area for the probability effect display 621 . In addition, the display screen 620 hides the large symbol group 501 and
21 display areas may be secured.

A display screen 624 shown in FIG. 58(1) is a display screen for displaying a symbol combination as a variation result corresponding to each of the variation display commands A, B, and C. FIG. The display screen 624 is the display screen after the short SP reach effect in the case of the variable display effect corresponding to the variable display command A, and the display screen after the short SP reach effect in the case of the variable display effect corresponding to the variable display command B. This is the display screen after the medium-hit probability performance, and in the case of the variable display performance corresponding to the variable display command C, it is the display screen after the long SP ready-to-win performance via short SP reach or the hit probability performance during fluctuation.

The display screen 624 stop-displays three symbols "3" in the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502, each of which is a winning mode. On the display screen 624, the pending digestion display 506 has a blank (blank) inside the frame to indicate that the special figure variation display game is in a stopped state.

A display screen 626 shown in FIG. 58(2) is a fanfare display screen. display screen 62
6 includes a fanfare effect display 627 similar to the winning effect display 621 of the winning effect during fluctuation in the display contents. The fanfare effect display 627 displays a effect image including the characters "Congratulations!" The display screen 626 hides the large symbol group 501 and the small symbol group 502 . Moreover, the display screen 626 hides the pending display 505 and the pending consumption display 506 . After displaying the fanfare display screen, the game machine 10 displays the round display during winning and the interval display.

Next, the announcement effect pattern selection table common to the variable display commands A, B, and C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of the announcement effect pattern selection table and the announcement effect pattern reliability of the fourth embodiment.

The notice effect pattern selection table (hit) shown in FIG. 59(1) is referred to when the effect control device 300 selects the notice effect as the display effect corresponding to the variable display commands A, B, and C. Note that the variable display commands A, B, and C are all variable display commands selected when deriving a win.

When the performance control device 300 receives the variable display commands A, B, and C and decides the announcement performance, it selects the announcement performance pattern YP1 corresponding to the fixed announcement performance with the selection probability YR01, and corresponds to the highly reliable announcement performance. The advance notice effect pattern YP2 to be selected is selected with the selection probability YR02, and the notice effect pattern YP3 corresponding to the low reliability advance notice effect is selected with the selection probability YR03. for example,
The selection probability YR01 is a probability of 10% assuming that the fixed advance notice effect is defined as a effect with a low appearance frequency. The selection probability YR02 is a probability of 70%, and the selection probability YR03 is a probability of 20%. Demonstrate reliability.

The notice effect pattern selection table (missing) shown in FIG.
is assigned the same effects as the variable display commands A, B, and C, while selecting the notice effect as the display effect corresponding to the variable display command (for example, the variable display commands D, E, and F) that derives "missing" Referenced.

When the performance control device 300 receives the variable display commands D, E, F and decides the announcement performance, it selects the announcement performance pattern YP1 corresponding to the fixed announcement performance with the selection probability YR11, and corresponds to the highly reliable announcement performance. The advance notice performance pattern YP2 to be selected is selected with a selection probability YR12, and the advance notice performance pattern YP3 corresponding to the low-reliability advance notice performance is selected with a selection probability YR13. for example,
The selection probability YR11 is a probability of 0% in order to produce a fixed advance notice effect. Selection probability YR12
has a probability of 10%, the probability of selection YR13 has a probability of 90%, and the advance notice effect pattern YP
The low reliability of the notice performance pattern YP3 is produced by setting the appearance rate at the time when the notice performance pattern YP3 is missed higher than that of 2.例文帳に追加

The notice effect pattern reliability shown in FIG. 59 (3) includes a hit probability, variable display commands A, B, C, D, It is determined by the distribution ratio of E and F. According to the notice effect pattern selection table (hit), the notice effect pattern selection table (loss), and other conditions, the notice effect pattern reliability is YE1 for the notice effect pattern YP1 corresponding to the fixed notice effect. The notice effect pattern YP2 corresponding to the high reliability notice effect has the reliability YE2, and the notice effect pattern YP3 corresponding to the low reliability notice effect has the reliability YE3. For example, the reliability YE1 is a reliability of 100% for producing a fixed notice, the reliability YE2 is a reliability of 50% for producing a high-reliability notice, and the reliability YE3 is a reliability for producing a low-reliability notice. degree is 5%.

In addition, the notice effect pattern selection table (hit) and the notice effect pattern selection table (
The error) is common to the variable display commands A, B, and C, but may be provided for each. Further, when the game machine 10 has a plurality of game modes and game states, the notice effect pattern selection table (hit) and the notice effect pattern selection table (loss) may be common to all the game modes and game states, It may be different. In addition to the announcement effect pattern selection table (hit) and the announcement effect pattern selection table (loss), the announcement effect pattern reliability includes the hit probability and the swings of the variable display commands A, B, C, D, E, and F. Although it is determined by the fraction, the notice effect pattern reliability may be set in advance in the notice effect pattern, and the notice effect pattern selection table (hit) and the notice effect pattern selection table (loss) are different. , a selection probability is set corresponding to the reliability of the announcement effect pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a description will be given of the probability of selecting the specific effect pattern executed when the variable display commands A, B, and C are received. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of specific effect pattern selection probabilities according to the fourth embodiment.

The specific effect pattern refers to a combination pattern of effects after the ready-to-win effect in the second half variation. A specific effect pattern for variable display commands A, B, and C is a specific effect pattern TP1.
, TP2, TP3. The specific effect pattern TP1 is a specific effect pattern in which a short SP ready-to-win effect is executed after a ready-to-win effect to derive a win. The specific effect pattern TP2 is a specific effect pattern in which a long SP ready-to-win effect is executed after a ready-to-win effect to derive a win. The specific production pattern TP3 is a long SP via short SP reach after reach production
It is a specific effect pattern that executes a reach effect and derives a win.

In the variable display commands A, B, and C, the specific effect pattern TP1 is selected with the selection probability TR1, the specific effect pattern TP2 is selected with the selection probability TR2, and the specific effect pattern TP3.
is selected with a selection probability TR3. Also in the variable display commands D, E, F, the specific effect patterns TP1, TP2, TP3 are each selected with a required probability.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 sets the reliability TE1 to the specific effect pattern TP1, sets the reliability TE2 to the specific effect pattern TP2, and sets the reliability TE3 to the specific effect pattern TP3. For example, the reliability TE1 is 5%, the reliability TE2 is 10%, and the reliability T
E3 is 20%. As a result, the game machine 10 can perform short SP reach production, long SP
Reliability can be set to increase in the order of reach performance and long SP reach performance via short SP reach. The game machine 10 may be set so that the reliability increases in the order of the short SP reach effect, the long SP reach effect via the short SP reach, and the long SP reach effect.

The reliability levels TE1, TE2, and TE3 are determined by the selection probabilities of the variable display commands A, B, and C, as well as the selection probabilities of the variable display commands D, E, and F.
It may vary depending on other parameters such as the distribution ratio of B, C, D, E and F.

Selection of such a specific effect pattern is classified in more detail according to the mode of the advance notice effect. For example, the selection probability of the specific effect pattern can be classified according to which of the final notice, the low reliability notice, and the high reliability notice is executed in the notice effect. In addition, after the notice effect pattern is drawn by lottery in the notice effect, it is not limited to the two-stage lottery in which the specific effect pattern is selected according to the lottery result of the notice effect pattern. It may be a lottery.

Here, the specific pattern selection ratio for each advance notice effect in the variable display commands A, B, and C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of the specific pattern selection ratio (hit) for each advance notice effect in the fourth embodiment.

In the variable display performance based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, the performance control device 300 executes the short SP ready-to-play performance at a rate of 70% when executing the fixed notice in the previous notice performance,
A long SP reach performance is executed at a rate of 10%, and a long SP reach performance via short SP reach is executed at a rate of 20%. In addition, the effect control device 300, the variable display command A,
In the variable display performance based on B and C, when the low reliability notice is executed in the notice performance, the short SP reach performance is executed at a rate of 20%, the long SP reach performance is executed at a rate of 60%, and the short SP reach performance is executed. A via long SP reach performance is executed at a rate of 20%. Further, the effect control device 300 executes the short SP ready-to-win effect at a rate of 10% when the high reliability notice is executed in the notice effect in the variable display effect based on the variable display commands A, B, and C,
A long SP reach performance is executed at a rate of 30%, and a long SP reach performance via short SP reach is executed at a rate of 60%.

In addition, in the variable display effects based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, the effect control device 300 performs the short SP reach effect (20 × a + 10 x b)%, long SP reach production is performed at a rate of (60 x a + 30 x b)%, long SP reach production via short SP reach is performed at a rate of (20 x a + 60 x b)% Run. At this time, a is the selection probability of the low-reliability advance notice in the non-fixed advance notice, and b is the selection probability of the high-reliability advance notice in the non-fixed advance notice. However, it is assumed that a, b<1 and a+b=1.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 is more likely to execute the short SP reach performance than the long SP reach performance or the long SP reach performance via the short SP reach when the final notice performance is executed. As a result, the game machine 10 prevents the game performance after the announcement of the advance notice from becoming redundant when the final notice performance is executed, thereby making it possible to reduce the decrease in interest. also,
The game machine 10 prevents the game performance after the advance notice from becoming redundant by performing the variation-in-probability performance in the surplus time in the latter-half variation in the variation display performance based on the variation display commands B and C, thereby reducing the interest. can be reduced.

Specifically, the game machine 10 reduces the chance of appearance of the long SP reach effect or the long SP reach effect via the short SP reach effect when the final notice effect is executed, thereby making the game effect after the notice notification redundant. prevent it from becoming a thing.

In addition, the game machine 10 determines the probability that the short SP ready-to-win performance is selected when the low-reliability notice is executed in the notice performance, and the short SP ready-to-win performance is selected when the high-reliability notice is executed in the notice performance. It is larger than the probability.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 allows the player who has lost his sense of expectation due to the low reliability notice to
The opportunity to feel redundant is suppressed by P reach performance and long SP reach performance via short SP reach. In addition, the game machine 10 prevents the player who has lost the sense of expectation due to the low reliability notice from further losing the sense of expectation by the short SP reach performance, and the low reliability notice and the short SP reach performance with the poor expectation. It is possible to improve interest by producing an unexpected feeling of deriving a hit despite the overlap of the above. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 can increase opportunities for players who have a sense of anticipation due to the high-reliability notice to feel interest through the long SP reach performance and the long SP reach performance via the short SP reach performance.

Note that the specific pattern selection ratio for each advance notice effect in the variable display commands A, B, and C may be changeable according to the game mode and game state. A modified example of changing the specific pattern selection ratio for each advance notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63. FIG. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of the specific pattern selection ratio (hit) for each advance notice effect in the modification of the fourth embodiment (part 1
). FIG. 63 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of the specific pattern selection ratio (hit) for each advance notice effect in the modification of the fourth embodiment.

The game machine 10 has, for example, modes A, B, and C as a plurality of presentation modes, and mode transitions are performed by a predetermined event trigger (which may be a timer trigger). The game machine 10 uses a specific pattern selection ratio for each advance notice effect for each mode, thereby effecting game characteristics for each mode.

FIG. 62(1) shows the specific pattern selection rate (mode A) for each advance notice effect. The specific pattern selection ratio by notice effect (mode A) is the same as the specific pattern selection ratio by notice effect described with reference to FIG. In the mode A, the game machine 10 suppresses the chance that the player who has lost the sense of expectation due to the low reliability notice feels redundant by the long SP reach performance or the long SP reach performance via the short SP reach. Further, in mode A, the game machine 10 prevents the player who has lost the sense of expectation due to the low reliability notice from further losing the sense of expectation due to the short SP ready-to-win effect, and the low reliability notice with the poor expectation is suppressed. Amusement can be improved by producing an unexpected feeling of deriving a win despite the overlap with the short SP reach production. On the other hand, in the mode A, the game machine 10 can expand opportunities for the player who has anticipation due to the high-reliability notice to feel interest through the long SP reach performance and the long SP reach performance via the short SP reach.

FIG. 62(2) shows the specific pattern selection rate (mode B) for each advance notice effect. In the variable display performance based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, the performance control device 300 executes the short SP reach performance at a rate of 100% and the long SP reach performance at a rate of 0% when the fixed notice is executed in the notice performance. , and long SP reach performance via short SP reach is executed at a rate of 0%. In addition, in the variable display performance based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, the performance control device 300 executes the short SP reach performance at a rate of 0% and the long SP reach performance when the low reliability notice is executed in the notice performance. Performance is executed at a rate of 70%, and long SP reach performance via short SP reach is executed at a rate of 30%. In addition, in the variable display performance based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, the performance control device 300 executes the short SP reach performance at a rate of 0% and the long SP reach performance when the high reliability notice is executed in the notice performance. Performance is executed at a rate of 30%, and long SP reach performance via short SP reach is executed at a rate of 70%.

In this way, the game machine 10 does not execute the long SP ready-to-win effect or the long SP reach-through-through-short SP ready-to-win effect when the final notice effect is executed, and the short SP ready-to-win effect is executed. As a result, the game machine 10 prevents the game performance after the announcement of the advance notice from becoming redundant when the final notice performance is executed, thereby making it possible to reduce the decrease in interest. Also, game machine 1
0 suppresses the game performance after the advance notification from becoming redundant and reduces the decline in interest by performing the winning performance during variation in the surplus time in the latter half variation in the variable display performance based on the variable display commands B and C. making it possible.

Specifically, the gaming machine 10 eliminates the chance of appearance of the long SP reach effect or the long SP reach effect via the short SP reach effect when the final notice effect is executed, thereby making the game effect after the notice notification redundant. prevent it from becoming a thing.

Further, the game machine 10 prevents the short SP reach performance from being selected when the low reliability notice or the high reliability notice is executed in the notice performance, so that the player who has expectations from the notice performance can enjoy the long SP reach performance. You can expand the opportunities to feel the interest by directing long SP reach via short SP reach.

In addition, the game machine 10 is designed so that a player who has a higher expectation from the announcement performance when the high-reliability announcement is executed than when the low-reliability announcement is executed in the announcement production can receive the long SP reach via the short SP reach. Opportunities to feel interest can be expanded by directing.

FIG. 62(3) shows the specific pattern selection rate (mode C) for each advance notice effect. In the variable display performance based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, the performance control device 300 executes the short SP reach performance at a rate of 70% and the long SP reach performance at a rate of 10% when the fixed notice is executed in the notice performance. 20% of long SP reach production via short SP reach
at a rate of In addition, in the variable display performance based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, the performance control device 300 executes the short SP reach performance at a rate of 10% and the long SP reach performance when the low reliability notice is executed in the notice performance. Execute the production at a rate of 30%, short S
Long SP reach performance via P reach is executed at a rate of 60%. In addition, production control device 30
0, in the variable display effects based on the variable display commands A, B, and C, when the high-reliability notice is executed in the notice effect, the short SP reach effect is executed at a rate of 20%, and the long SP reach effect is executed at a rate of 60%. Executed at a ratio, 20% of long SP reach production via short SP reach
at a rate of

The game machine 10 calculates the probability of selecting the short SP ready-to-win effect when executing the low reliability notice in the notice effect from the probability of selecting the short SP ready-to-win effect when executing the high reliability notice in the notice effect. is also smaller.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 allows the player who has lost his sense of expectation due to the low reliability notice to
To increase the chance of feeling redundant by P reach performance and long SP reach performance via short SP reach. In addition, the game machine 10 increases the chance that the player, who has lost his sense of expectation due to the low reliability notice, will further lose his sense of expectation through the short SP reach performance.

Such a game machine 10 is suitable for a production mode in which the player feels interest in the careless game production. In addition, such a gaming machine 10 has the effect of highlighting the characteristics of each mode in the comparison of each mode.

The game machine 10 has a plurality of game states, for example, a normal game state and a specific game state A
, B, and changes the game state with a predetermined event trigger. The game machine 10 uses a specific pattern selection ratio for each of the advance notice effects for each game state, thereby producing a game property for each game state.

In addition, the normal game state and the specific game states A and B may be distinguished as different game states. Specific game state A is high probability, mainly special figure 2 game game progress, with normal electric support, specific game state B is low probability, mainly special figure 2 game game progress, no general electric support. In addition, the specific game state B may have other game properties such as high probability, mainly special figure 1 game game progress, no general electric support.

FIG. 63(1) shows the specific pattern selection rate (normal game state) for each advance notice effect. The specific pattern selection ratio for each advance notice effect (normal game state) is the same as the specific pattern selection ratio for each advance notice effect described with reference to FIG. The game machine 10 suppresses the chance that a player who has lost his sense of expectation due to the low-reliability notice in a normal game state feels redundant by the long SP reach performance or the long SP reach performance via the short SP reach. In addition, the game machine 10 prevents the player, who has lost the sense of expectation due to the low reliability notice, from further losing the sense of expectation due to the short SP reach performance in the normal game state, and suppresses the low reliability notice with the poor expectation. Even though the short SP reach performance overlaps with the short SP reach performance, it is possible to produce an unexpected feeling of deriving a win, thereby increasing interest. On the other hand, the game machine 10 can expand opportunities for players who have a sense of anticipation from the high-reliability notice in the normal game state to feel interest through the long SP reach performance and the long SP reach performance via the short SP reach.

FIG. 63(2) shows the specific pattern selection rate (specific game state A) for each advance notice effect. The specific pattern selection ratio by notice effect (specific game state A) is the same as the specific pattern selection ratio by notice effect described with reference to FIG. 62(2).

In this way, the game machine 10 does not execute the long SP ready-to-win effect or the long SP reach-through-through-short SP ready-to-win effect when the final notice effect is executed, and the short SP ready-to-win effect is executed. As a result, the game machine 10 prevents the game performance after the announcement of the advance notice from becoming redundant when the final notice performance is executed, thereby making it possible to reduce the decrease in interest. Also, game machine 1
0 suppresses the game performance after the advance notification from becoming redundant and reduces the decline in interest by performing the winning performance during variation in the surplus time in the latter half variation in the variable display performance based on the variable display commands B and C. making it possible.

Specifically, the gaming machine 10 eliminates the chance of appearance of the long SP reach effect or the long SP reach effect via the short SP reach effect when the final notice effect is executed, thereby making the game effect after the notice notification redundant. prevent it from becoming a thing.

Further, the game machine 10 prevents the short SP reach performance from being selected when the low reliability notice or the high reliability notice is executed in the notice performance, so that the player who has expectations from the notice performance can enjoy the long SP reach performance. You can expand the opportunities to feel the interest by directing long SP reach via short SP reach.

In addition, the game machine 10 is designed so that a player who has a higher expectation from the announcement performance when the high-reliability announcement is executed than when the low-reliability announcement is executed in the announcement production can receive the long SP reach via the short SP reach. Opportunities to feel interest can be expanded by directing.

FIG. 63(3) shows the specific pattern selection rate (specific game state B) for each advance notice effect. The specific pattern selection ratio by notice effect (specific game state B) is the same as the specific pattern selection ratio by notice effect described with reference to FIG. 62(3).

The game machine 10 calculates the probability of selecting the short SP ready-to-win effect when executing the low reliability notice in the notice effect from the probability of selecting the short SP ready-to-win effect when executing the high reliability notice in the notice effect. is also smaller.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 allows the player who has lost his sense of expectation due to the low reliability notice to
To increase the chance of feeling redundant by P reach performance and long SP reach performance via short SP reach. In addition, the game machine 10 increases the chance that the player, who has lost his sense of expectation due to the low reliability notice, will further lose his sense of expectation through the short SP reach performance.

Such a game machine 10 is suitable for a game state in which the player feels interest in a careless game presentation. In addition, such a gaming machine 10 has an effect of highlighting the characteristics of each game state in comparison for each game state. In addition, such a gaming machine 10 assists the player in estimating the game state when the game state is made clear to the player.

Note that the specific pattern selection ratio for each notice effect for each effect mode described with reference to FIG. 62 and the specific pattern selection ratio for each notice effect for each game state described with reference to FIG. may be a selection ratio of Also, although the production modes explained with reference to FIG. There may be. Also, although the game states explained with reference to FIG.
It may be two, or four or more.

Also, the game states may be classified into two or more game states, which are normally treated as one game state, according to a predetermined condition. For example, even if it is a normal game state, it may be divided into a normal game state A for up to 20 fluctuation display times from the end of general electric support, and a normal game state B for other normal game states. In addition, even in the normal electric support game state, the first half of 50 out of 100 normal electric support fluctuation display times is the normal electric support game state A.
, 51 times and after may be classified like the general electric support game state B. Further, even in the probability variation (high probability) gaming state, it may be divided into the probability variation gaming state A until the detection of a predetermined trigger after the probability variation, and the probability variation gaming state B after the predetermined trigger. .

Further, the transition of the classified game state may be in one direction such as from the specific game state A to the specific game state B, or from the specific game state A to the specific game state B, and from the specific game state B to the specific game state. It may be bi-directional like A.

Next, a modification of the variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command B1 of the modification of the fourth embodiment.

The variable display command B1 is one of variable display commands that the game control device 100 transmits to the effect control device 300 . The variable display command B1 is a command corresponding to a variable display effect with a variable time T1 (>T0).

The effect control device 300 receives the variable display command B1, generates a variable display effect for the variable time T1, and executes the variable display effect in a required effect device. The variable display command B1 is
Since the variation time is longer than that of the variable display command A, it has an aspect that various effects can be performed than that of the variable display command A, but it also has a aspect that the time for deriving the result is slower than that of the variable display command A.

The effect control device 300 executes the first half variation and the second half variation within the variation time T1. The change display command B1 allocates time T11 (=T01) of the change time T1 to the first half change, and allocates time T12 (>T02) to the second half change. Note that the time T11 is the time T12
shorter than

The second half variation of the variable display command B1 includes a notice effect at time T121, a reach effect at time T122, and a long SP reach effect at time T123 (effect pattern B01), and a notice effect at time T121 and time T122. a ready-to-win effect, a variable winning effect at time T125, and a short SP ready-to-reach effect at time T124 (=T023) (effect pattern B03).

In this way, the game machine 10 may perform the winning-while-fluctuation effect prior to the short SP ready-to-win effect. In addition, the game machine 10 may divide the winning performance during fluctuation in two and sandwich the short SP ready-to-win performance between the two divided winning performances during fluctuation. In addition, the game machine 10 may perform a winning-while-fluctuation effect prior to the ready-to-win effect. Also, the gaming machine 10 may perform a winning effect during fluctuation prior to the advance notice effect. however,
In the case where the winning performance during fluctuation is performed prior to the notice performance, the game machine 10 may replace the winning performance during fluctuation with a freezing performance or the like that does not guide the winning performance. In addition, the game machine 10 may insert the subdivided hit certain effect during the variation, such as before and after the ready-to-win effect, at various places in the latter half of the variation.

The performance control device 300 can selectively execute the performance pattern B01 and the performance pattern B03 when receiving the variable display command B1, and when executing the hit performance in the advance notice performance, the performance pattern B03 is executed rather than the performance pattern B01. makes it easier to select

A game machine 10 makes it easy to select a performance pattern B03 capable of announcing the result prior to the performance pattern B01 since there is little contribution to the improvement of interest even if the expectation is aroused in the performance after the execution of the fixed advance notice performance. . As a result, the game machine 10 prevents the game performance after the advance notification from becoming redundant and causing a decrease in interest, and enables the game performance after the result is determined even during the variable display, thereby improving the interest. .

In this way, the game machine 10 can make the game effect after the advance notice non-redundant by the amount that the time T124 of the short SP reach effect is shorter than the time T123 of the long SP reach effect. In addition, the game machine 10 can allocate the time T125 of the hit certain effect during fluctuation to the effect after the win is confirmed.

Further, the gaming machine 10 outputs the variable display command B1 having a longer variable time than the variable display command A.
, the game result is guided by the short SP ready-to-win effect similar to the variable display command A, and non-redundant game progress can be realized by allocating the winning effect during fluctuation to the surplus time.

The variable display command B1 is for deriving a win as a result of a short SP reach effect or a result of a long SP reach effect. Prepare separately.

Next, another example of a variation of the variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command B, shown in FIG.
will be used to explain. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode corresponding to the variable display command B2 of the modification of the fourth embodiment.

The variable display command B2 is one of variable display commands that the game control device 100 transmits to the effect control device 300 . The variable display command B2 is a command corresponding to a variable display effect with a variable time T1 (>T0).

The effect control device 300 receives the variable display command B2, generates a variable display effect for the variable time T1, and executes the variable display effect in a required effect device. The variable display command B2 is
Since the variation time is longer than that of the variable display command A, it has an aspect that various effects can be performed than that of the variable display command A, but it also has a aspect that the time for deriving the result is slower than that of the variable display command A.

The effect control device 300 executes the first half variation and the second half variation within the variation time T1. The change display command B2 allocates time T11 (=T01) of the change time T1 to the first half change, and allocates time T12 (>T02) to the second half change. Note that the time T11 is the time T12
shorter than

The second half variation of the variable display command B2 includes the advance notice effect at time T121, the reach effect at time T122, and the long SP reach effect at time T123 (effect pattern B01), the advance notice effect at time T121, and the effect at time T122. and the hit-and-finish effect during fluctuation at time T123 (effect pattern B04), the advance notice effect at time T121, and the time T126
(=T122+T123) There is a case (effect pattern B05) including a hit probability effect during fluctuation.

In this way, the game machine 10 may perform the winning-while-fluctuation effect without performing the short SP ready-to-win effect. Further, the gaming machine 10 may perform not only the short SP ready-to-win effect but also the winning effect during fluctuation without performing the ready-to-win effect.

The performance control device 300 can selectively execute the performance pattern B01, the performance pattern B04, and the performance pattern B05 when receiving the variable display command B2, and when the hit performance is executed in the advance notice performance, the performance pattern B01 is executed. also makes it easy to select the effect patterns B04 and B05.

The game machine 10 selects the performance patterns B04 and B05 capable of informing the result prior to the performance pattern B01 because there is little contribution to the enhancement of interest even if the expectation is aroused in the performance after the execution of the final notice performance. make it easier. As a result, the game machine 10 prevents the game performance after the advance notification from becoming redundant and causing a decrease in interest, and enables the game performance after the result is determined even during the variable display, thereby improving the interest. .

In this way, the game machine 10 can make the game effect non-redundant for the time T123 of the long SP reach effect or after the advance notification. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can allocate an amount obtained by adding the time T122 of the ready-to-win effect to the time T123 of the long SP ready-to-win effect to the effect after winning is confirmed.

In addition, the game machine 10 outputs the variable display command B2 having a longer variable time than the variable display command A.
In the above, non-redundant progress of the game can be realized by guiding the game result by the final notice effect. Note that the variable display command B2 is for deriving a win as a result, and the gaming machine 10 prepares a command for deriving a loss as a result separately from the variable display command B2.

Next, a modified example of the appearance timing of the final announcement effect will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 6
6 is a diagram showing an example of the appearance timing of the fixed advance notice effect of the modified example of the fourth embodiment.
When a confirmed character for notifying the winning confirmation appears as the confirmation announcement effect, the gaming machine 10:
Confirmed character appearance patterns 1 to 5 can be used. The confirmation character may guide the confirmation of winning by its display mode, such as guiding the winning as a message, or a display mode in which ordinary players can naturally feel the confirmation of winning by rainbow display or the like. Alternatively, the confirmation of the hit may be guided by a display mode in which a player who has a lot of gaming experience can sense the confirmation of the hit by not sharing with other effects. . Also, the confirmed character does not necessarily have to be a character, and may be a cut-in, a message itself, or the like.

A fixed character appearance pattern 1 is a performance mode in which a fixed character appears only once during the production period of the fixed advance notice production. At this time, the appearance period of the confirmed character can be arbitrarily set within the range of the confirmed announcement effect period.

Confirmed character appearance patterns 2 and 3 are performance modes in which the confirmed character continues to appear beyond the performance period of the confirmed advance notice effect. The appearance period of the confirmed character in the confirmed character appearance pattern 2 can be arbitrarily set within the range of the ready-to-win effect period and the short SP ready-to-win effect period. The appearance period of the confirmed character in the confirmed character appearance pattern 3 can be arbitrarily set within the range of the variable display period that exceeds the short SP ready-to-win production period and includes the variable hit certain production period. In addition, the fixed character may change the display mode during its appearance. Presence or absence, magnitude of game value that can be acquired, etc.) may be provided.

A confirmed character appearance pattern 4 is an effect mode in which a confirmed character appears two or more times during the effect period of the confirmed advance notice effect. At this time, the appearance period of the fixed character can be arbitrarily set within the range of the variable display period starting from the fixed notice effect period. It should be noted that the confirmed character may change its display mode in addition to its appearance count and appearance timing. You may do so.

The confirmed character appearance pattern 5 is an effect mode in which two or more confirmed characters appear during the effect period of the confirmed advance notice effect. For example, in the fixed character appearance pattern 5, the fixed character A appears from the fixed advance notice performance period to the ready-to-win performance period, and the fixed character B appears from the ready-to-win performance period overlapped with the appearance of the fixed character A beyond the ready-to-win performance period.

It should be noted that the confirmed character A may appear after the ready-to-win effect period as in the case of the confirmed character B, or the appearance end timing may be the same. Further, when the confirmed character A is a character of the fixed notice performance, when the character appears in the ready-to-win effect, the short SP ready-to-win effect, or the long SP ready-to-win effect, the character may be changed to the hit mode. Note that although overlapping timings are provided to make confirmed character A and confirmed character B appear, overlapping timings may be provided to cause three or more confirmed characters to appear.

It should be noted that the combination or overlapping mode of two or more confirmed characters may be changed, and the magnitude of the expected value that the player can obtain from the combination or overlapping mode of the confirmed characters may be guided.

Next, FIG. 6 shows a modified example of the display screen during a game corresponding to the variable display commands A, B, and C.
7 will be used for explanation. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the modification of the fourth embodiment.

A display screen 628 shown in FIG. 67(1) is a display screen during a freeze effect, and is a display screen corresponding to the second half variation common to the variation display commands A, B, and C. FIG. The freeze effect can be executed as a fixed advance notice effect, and can also be executed as a hit probability effect during fluctuation. The display screen 628 includes a large pattern group 501, a small pattern group 502, a special figure 1 reserved number display 503, a special figure 2 reserved number display 504
, pending display 505, pending digestion display 506, pending icon 507, pending digestion icon 508
is included in the display contents.

A display screen 628 displays a freeze display 629 overlaid on the large pattern group 501 . Freeze display 629 displays the message "FREEZE WARNING" and the message "WARNING" in an area bounded by yellow and black striped warning tape. Further, the display screen 628 displays the small pattern group 502 superimposed on the freeze display 629 in place of the large pattern group 501 to clearly indicate that the variable display is being performed.

A display screen 630 shown in FIG. 67( 2 ) is a display screen following the display screen 628 . On the display screen 630, the character 631 appearing from the left end of the display area pushes the freeze display 629 toward the right end to perform a freeze effect cancellation effect. Characters 631 include, for example, a character such as a pig and a message tape "Congratulations!".

A display screen 632 shown in FIG. 67( 3 ) is a display screen following the display screen 630 . On the display screen 632, the character 631 pushing the freeze display 629 to the right end side exits to the right end side while announcing the confirmation of the hit with the message tape "Congratulations!".
The display screen 632 displays the large pattern group 501 in the display area where the freeze display 629 is pushed out to the right end side.
is displayed with good visibility. Also, the large pattern group 501 can change the pattern display mode before and after overlapping with the freeze display 629 . The display screen 632 displays the large symbol group 501 in a symbol combination that is a winning mode.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform a freeze effect. The game machine 10 can execute the freezing effect as the winning effect during fluctuation. Such a freeze effect displays the large symbol group 501 in a symbol combination that becomes a winning mode like the display screen 632 when the winning effect during fluctuation is executed after the short SP ready-to-win effect. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 64, the large symbol group 501 may be displayed with a symbol combination in a ready-to-win state when the winning-while-fluctuation effect is executed before the short SP ready-to-win effect.

Such a game machine 10 prevents the game performance after the advance notification from becoming redundant and causing a decrease in interest, and improves the interest by enabling the game performance after the result is determined even during the variable display. .

It should be noted that the game machine 10 is capable of giving a notice effect that the result of the game is a hit.
It is not limited to a hit, and may be a forewarning effect indicating that the result of the game is a special result.
The special result includes, for example, winning, stoppage of specific symbols, stoppage of special symbols (zonal entry symbols, etc.). The stopping of specific symbols is the stopping of symbols not limited to hits, and includes, for example, the stopping of predetermined chance symbols and the like. A chance symbol is a predetermined symbol combination, for example, there is a permutation combination such as a left symbol "1", a middle symbol "2", and a right symbol "3". In addition, the stopping of special symbols includes the stopping of symbols with special meanings. Note that the special pattern may not be displayed normally. For example, special symbols are symbols that guide mode changes, symbols that guide entry into a predetermined zone (game state, production state, etc.), occurrence and development of reach, and advance notice and occurrence of hits. It may be a design to guide you.

The gaming machine 10 (including modifications) of the fourth embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 executes a notice effect (for example, a fixed notice effect, a low-reliability notice effect, a high-reliability notice effect) that announces the result of a game (for example, a special figure 1 game, a special figure 2 game). Possible advance notice effect means (for example, game control device 100, effect control device 300, display device 4
1) and specific effect means (for example,
It includes a game control device 100, a performance control device 300, and a display device 41). The notice effect means provides a fixed notice effect (for example, a fixed notice effect, FIG. 56 (1)) for confirming that the result of the game is a win, and giving a notice that the result of the game is a win with a predetermined reliability. It is possible to selectively execute non-fixed announcement effects (for example, low-reliability announcement effects, high-reliability announcement effects, FIGS. 55(2) and (3)). The specific rendering means performs the derivation process at a first time (for example, time T1
24) produces a first specific effect (for example, short SP reach effect), and a second specific effect (for example, , long SP reach effect) can be selectively executed, and when the notice effect means executes the fixed notice effect, the rate at which the second specific effect is selected (for example, 10%, FIG. 6
1) Increase the ratio of selection of the first specific effect (for example, 70%, FIG. 61).

(2) The notice effect means of (1), when executing a non-fixed notice effect (for example, a low-reliability notice effect, a high-reliability notice effect), determines that the result of the game is a win. (for example, 5%, FIG. 59(3)) and a first non-fixed notice effect (for example, a low-reliability notice effect) and a second higher reliability than the first that the result of the game is a hit. 2 (for example, 50%, FIG. 59 (3)) can selectively execute a second non-fixed notice effect (for example, high reliability notice effect), and the specific effect means is a game When deriving a hit as a result of the above, the advance notice effect means has a higher probability than the ratio of selecting the first specific effect (for example, 10%, FIG. 61) when the notice effect means executes the second non-fixed notice effect. The ratio (for example, 20%, FIG. 61) of selecting the first specific effect when one non-fixed advance notice effect is executed is increased.

(3) The gaming machine 10 executes a notice effect (for example, a fixed notice effect, a low-reliability notice effect, a high-reliability notice effect) that announces the result of a game (for example, a special figure 1 game, a special figure 2 game). Possible advance notice effect means (for example, game control device 100, effect control device 300, display device 4
1) and specific effect means (for example,
It includes a game control device 100, a performance control device 300, and a display device 41). The notice effect means is a final notice effect (for example, ,
56 (1)), and non-fixed notice effects (for example, low-reliability notice effects, high-reliability notice effects, FIG. 55 (2
), (3)) can be selectively executed. The specific effect means provides a first specific effect (for example, short SP reach effect) that directs the derivation process in a first period (for example, time T124), and a second period that is different from the first period ( For example, it is possible to selectively execute a second specific effect (for example, long SP reach effect) to be produced at time T123), and when the advance notice effect means executes the fixed advance notice effect, the second specific effect is produced. The percentage of selection of the first specific effect (eg, 70%, FIG. 61) is higher than the percentage of selection (eg, 10%, FIG. 61).
) is increased.

(4) The advance notice effect means of (3), when executing a non-fixed advance notice effect (for example, a low-reliability advance notice effect, a high-reliability advance notice effect), has the first confidence that the result of the game is a special result. Every time(
For example, 5%, the first non-fixed notice effect (for example, low reliability notice effect) announced in FIG. 2 (for example, 50%, FIG. 59 (3)) can selectively execute a second non-fixed notice effect (for example, high reliability notice effect), and the specific effect means is a game When deriving a special result as a result of , the advance notice effect means is more likely to select the first specific effect when the second non-fixed notice effect is executed (for example, 10%, FIG. 61) The ratio (for example, 20%, FIG. 61) of selecting the first specific effect when the first non-fixed advance notice effect is executed is increased.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the description of the gaming machines of the first to fourth embodiments, the game board 30 (see FIG. 2)
, or a game machine having a game board 800 (see FIG. 28), the game machine of the fifth embodiment can be applied to any of them. It should be noted that the same reference numerals may be used for the same configurations as those of the first to fourth embodiments, and descriptions thereof may be omitted.

The game machine 10 of the fifth embodiment creates expectations for further changes and maintains even greater expectations for the game result even if there is an advance notification effect due to the display mode of the starting memory lacking expectations. First, the display screen of the gaming machine 10 during a game will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a game according to the fifth embodiment.

A display screen 650 is a display screen after the start of the variable display. The display screen 650 displays the large symbol group 5
01, a small pattern group 502, a special figure 1 reserved number display 503, a special figure 2 reserved number display 504, a reserved display (holding standby display) 505, and a reserved consumption display 506 are included in the display contents.

Suspension display (suspension standby display) 505 displays the number of suspension icons (suspension standby icon) 660 corresponding to special figure 1 suspension number display 503 . The pending icon 660 has a double-structured display mode in which a colored sphere is placed inside a transparent sphere. Pending consumption display 506 displays pending consumption icon 655 . Pending digestion icon 655 is also similar to pending icon 660:
It is a display mode with a double structure in which a colored sphere is inside a transparent sphere.

Here, the dual structure display mode of the pending icon 660 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a dual structure display mode of the pending icon according to the fifth embodiment.
Suspended icon 660 includes an outer shell icon 661 and an inner core icon 662 as display elements. The pending icon 660 has a dual structure display mode in which a transparent spherical outer shell icon 661 encloses a colored spherical inner core icon 662 . The inner core icon 662 has a function (expectation level reporting function) of reporting the level of expectation for the result of the variable display game by its display mode. The outer shell icon 661 has a function (expectation level change suggesting function) of suggesting the possibility that the level of expectation notified by the inner core icon 662 will change. In addition, the pending digestion icon 65
5 also has a configuration similar to that of the pending icon 660 .

Next, a display mode that clearly guides the degree of expectation of the inner core icon 662 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the display mode of the inner core icon and the degree of expectation according to the fifth embodiment. The inner core icon 662 has inner core icon display modes pt01, pt02, pt03, pt04, pt05, and pt06 as display modes that clearly guide expectations.

The inner core icon display mode pt01 is a standard (default) display mode in which no expectations are indicated. The inner core icon display mode pt01 is, for example, a white spherical shape. The inner core icon display mode pt02 is a display mode for guiding low expectations (for example, expectations as low as about 5%). The inner core icon display mode pt02 is, for example, a green spherical shape. The inner core icon display mode pt03 is a display mode for guiding a medium level of expectation (for example, a medium level of expectation of about 20%). The inner core icon display mode pt03 is, for example, a blue spherical shape. The inner core icon display mode pt04 is a display mode for guiding a high degree of expectation (for example, a high degree of expectation of about 30%). The inner core icon display mode pt04 is, for example, a yellow spherical shape. The inner core icon display mode pt05 is a display mode for guiding extremely high expectations (for example, extremely high expectations of about 80%). The inner core icon display mode pt05 is
For example, a red spherical shape. The inner core icon display mode pt06 is a display mode that guides the determination of winning (for example, determination of winning). The inner core icon display mode pt06 is, for example,
It is a spherical shape with a rainbow color and a pattern with the character "Atto".

Next, a display mode for indefinitely guiding the degree of expectation of the inner core icon 662 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in which the degree of expectation of the core icon of the fifth embodiment is vaguely indicated. The inner core icon 662 includes inner core icon display modes pt01, pt02, pt03, pt04, pt05, pt0 as display modes that clearly guide expectations.
6 was explained earlier. The inner core icon 662 is displayed in the inner core icon display mode pt01.
, pt02, pt03, pt04, pt05, and pt06 can be displayed at the same time to indicate which of the expectations indicated by the two color elements is guided.

The inner core icon 662 shown in FIG. 71(1) is the inner core icon display mode pt02, and clearly indicates the low expectation level with a green spherical shape. Inner core icon 66 shown in FIG. 71(2)
In 2a, the core icon display mode pt02 is 75%, and the core icon display mode pt03 is 25%.
%. The inner core icon 662a vaguely indicates whether the expectation level is low or medium, with a gradation of 75% green and 25% blue. The inner core icon 662b shown in FIG. 71(3) has the inner core icon display mode pt
02 in 50% and the inner core icon display mode pt03 in 50%. The inner core icon 662b vaguely indicates whether the expectation level is low or medium level by the spherical shape of the gradation of 50% green and 50% blue. The core icon 662c shown in FIG. 71(4) has a core icon display mode pt02 of 25% and a core icon display mode pt of 25%.
03 at 75%. The inner core icon 662c vaguely indicates whether the expectation level is low or medium, with a gradation of 25% green and 75% blue.

In this way, the inner core icon 662 has the inner core icon display modes pt01, pt02, pt
03, pt04, pt05, and pt06 not only provide guidance by clarifying the degree of expectation, but also provide indefinite guidance while indicating the possibility of which degree of expectation.

Although the inner core icons 662a, 662b, and 662c show a mixture of two colors by gradation, they may be shown by mixing two colors in a mosaic-like or stripe-like manner, or the original colors may be reproduced by mixing colors. It may be indicated in an indefinite manner, or it may be indicated by an animation which color can be changed to without uniquely indicating which color it is. In addition, although the core icons 662a, 662b, and 662c indicate a mixture of two colors, they may indicate a mixture of three or more colors.

By using such an inner core icon 662 to make a pending notice, the gaming machine 10 can make an unclear expectation level notification in addition to a clear expectation level notification.
In addition, the gaming machine 10 can guide the candidate of the display mode to be changed even in the case of performing unclear expectation level notification. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can suggest the possibility when guiding candidates for the display mode to be changed.

Next, the display mode of the outer shell icon 661 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the display mode of the outer shell icon and the possibility of change according to the fifth embodiment. The outer shell icon 661 does not have a display mode that directly guides expectations, but the inner core icon 66
It has a display mode that guides two change possibilities. The outer shell icon 661 is the inner core icon 66
2 to produce the appearance of the core icon 662 , and the disappearance of the outer shell icon 661 triggers a change in the display mode of the core icon 662 .

The outer shell icon 661 shown in FIG. 72(1) is in a standard mode, and is a display mode in which the included inner core icon 662 (not shown) is easily observed by transparent display. The outer shell icon 661a shown in FIG. 72(2) is the outer shell change announcement mode a. The outer shell icon 661a is a display mode showing a state in which the outer shell is slightly cracked. The outer shell icon 661a indicates the possibility of disappearance of the outer shell icon 661, that is, the possibility of changing the display mode of the inner core icon 662, based on the state that the outer shell is cracked. The outer shell icon 661a also indicates that the possibility of changing the display mode of the inner core icon 662 is not large because the crack in the outer shell is slight.

The outer shell icon 661b shown in FIG. 72(3) is the outer shell change notice mode b. The outer shell icon 661b is a display mode showing a state in which the outer shell has many cracks. shell icon 66
1b guides the possibility of disappearance of the outer shell icon 661, that is, the possibility of changing the display mode of the inner core icon 662, from the appearance that the outer shell has many cracks. Note that the outer shell icon 661
b also indicates that there is a large possibility of changing the display mode of the inner core icon 662 because there are many cracks in the outer shell.

The outer shell icon 661c shown in FIG. 72(4) is the outer shell change announcement mode c. The outer shell icon 661c is a display mode showing how the outer shell collapses and disappears. Outer shell icon 661c
is the disappearance of the outer shell icon 661, that is, the inner core icon 6
62 display mode changes. The pending icon 660 is triggered by the disappearance of the outer shell icon 661 to change the display mode of the inner core icon 662 .

Note that the outer shell icons 661a, 661b, and 661c are replaced by the outer shell icon 66 due to cracks.
Although the possibility of disappearance of 1 is shown, the possibility of disappearance of the outer shell icon 661, that is, the possibility of changing the display form of the inner core icon 662 may be indicated by other aspects.

The gaming machine 10 uses such an outer shell icon 661 to indicate the possibility of changing the inner core icon 662, so that the inner core icon 662 can be displayed even if the display mode of the inner core icon 662 does not change.
It is possible to give a sense of anticipation to the second display mode change. Note that the gaming machine 10 has the outer shell icon 6
The number, size, shape, etc. of the cracks 61 may indicate the degree of change in the display mode of the inner core icon 662 . For example, the gaming machine 10 raises the display mode of the inner core icon 662 by one rank (for example,
change from the inner core icon display mode pt01 to the inner core icon display mode pt02), and when the outer shell icon 661 disappears with only a slight crack, the display mode of the inner core icon 662 is increased by two ranks (for example, the inner core icon display mode Inner core icon display mode p from pt01
t03).

Next, the change pattern of the pending icon 660 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. FIG.
FIG. 73 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a change pattern of a pending icon according to the fifth embodiment; 74 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a change pattern of a pending icon according to the fifth embodiment; FIG.
is.

The pending icon change pattern shown in FIG. 73(1) shows how the display mode of the pending icon 660 is changed by changing the display mode of the core icon 662 while the outer shell icon 661 does not change its display mode. The inner core icon 662 has a standard display mode (
For example, from the inner core icon display mode pt01), through the inner core change notice modes a, b, and c, the standard display mode (for example, inner core icon display mode pt02) with one level higher expectation than the initial mode
) (hold change success effect by inner core icon 662). At this time, the inner core change notice modes a, b, and c are display modes in which the inner core icon display mode pt01 and the inner core icon display mode pt02 are mixed.

The gaming machine 10 changes the display mode of the core icon 662 even when the display mode of the outer shell icon 661 does not change, according to such a pending icon change pattern. can be produced.

The pending icon change pattern shown in FIG. 73(2) shows how the outer shell icon 661 and the core icon 662 change their display modes, and the display mode of the pending icon 660 changes. The inner core icon 662 changes from the initial standard display mode (for example, inner core icon display mode pt01) to the standard display mode (for example, inner core It changes to the icon display mode pt02). At this time, the core change notice modes a, b, and c are the core icon display mode pt01 and the core icon display mode p
t02 and t02 are mixed. Further, the outer shell icon 661 disappears from the standard mode, which is the initial mode, through the outer shell change announcement modes a, b, and c. The gaming machine 10 has an inner core icon 66
2 is a standard display mode that is one level higher than the initial mode (for example, the core icon display mode p
By making the outer shell icon 661 disappear at the timing of the change to t02), the change possibility of the pending display mode and the change destination can be determined from both the display mode change of the inner core icon 662 and the display mode change of the outer shell icon 661. (pending change success effect by outer shell icon 661). Since such a pending icon change pattern is accompanied by the disappearance of the outer shell icon 661, the change destination of the inner core icon 662 may be set to a standard display mode (for example, inner core icon display mode pt04) with two or more levels of high expectations. good.

The pending icon change pattern shown in FIG. 73(3) shows how the display mode of the pending icon 660 is changed by changing the display mode of the core icon 662 while the outer shell icon 661 does not change its display mode. The inner core icon 662 has a standard display mode (
For example, from the inner core icon display mode pt01), through the inner core change notice modes a, b, and c, the standard display mode (for example, inner core icon display mode pt02) with one level higher expectation than the initial mode
) and does not change to a standard display mode (for example, the core icon display mode pt0
Return to 1) (pending change failure presentation). The gaming machine 10 is expected to develop such expectations (for example,
With a pending icon change pattern that does not involve promotion from the core icon display mode pt01 to the core icon display mode pt02, it is possible to ensure frequent execution opportunities for the pending effect.

The pending icon change pattern shown in FIG. 73(4) shows how the outer shell icon 661 and the core icon 662 change their display modes, and the display mode of the pending icon 660 changes. The inner core icon 662 changes from the initial standard display mode (for example, inner core icon display mode pt01) to the standard display mode (for example, inner core The icon display mode pt02) does not change to the standard display mode (for example, the inner core icon display mode pt01) as the initial mode, but the outer shell icon 661 changes from the standard mode in which the outer shell icon 661 is the initial mode to the outer shell change notice mode a, By disappearing through b and c, the display mode changes to the display mode (for example, core icon display mode pt02) at different times (holding change relief effect). The gaming machine 10 detects failure to change the inner core icon 662 as the outer shell icon 6
61 changes can help. Similarly, the gaming machine 10 can compensate for the change failure of the outer shell icon 661 by changing the inner core icon 662 . Such a game machine 10 can produce a high expectation due to the presence of the suspension change relieving performance even if the suspension change performance fails.

In the pending icon change pattern shown in FIG. 74(1), the outer shell icon 661 changes its display mode while the core icon 662 does not change its display mode.
60 shows that the display mode of 60 does not change. The core icon 662 remains unchanged in the standard display mode (for example, the core icon display mode pt01) which is the initial mode. shell icon 6
61 changes from the standard mode, which is the initial mode, to outer shell change notice modes a and b, but returns to the standard mode without disappearing. The gaming machine 10 secures opportunities for frequent execution of pending effects by means of a pending icon change pattern that does not accompany such development of expectations (for example, an upgrade from the core icon display mode pt01 to the core icon display mode pt02). be able to. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can ensure frequent holding performance execution opportunities by means of a holding icon change pattern that does not involve a change in the display mode of the core icon 662 .

The pending icon change pattern shown in FIG. 74(2) shows how the display mode of the pending icon 660 is changed by changing the display mode of the outer shell icon 661 while the core icon 662 does not change its display mode. While the core icon 662 remains unchanged in the standard display mode (for example, the core icon display mode pt01) which is the initial mode, the outer shell icon 661
disappears from the standard mode, which is the initial mode, through the outer shell change announcement modes a, b, and c. As a result, the inner core icon display mode pt01 changes to a standard display mode (for example, inner core icon display mode pt02) that is one level higher than the initial mode without going through the inner core change notice modes a, b, and c. The gaming machine 10 can perform a suspension notice effect with a sense of surprise by changing the outer shell icon 661 even if the inner core icon 662 does not change.

It should be noted that the intermediate display modes of the inner core icon 662 (for example, inner core change announcement modes a, b, and c)
And, the intermediate display modes of the outer shell icon 661 (for example, the outer shell change notice modes a, b, and c) are
It can be initialized at any time. The initialization of the intermediate display mode of the inner core icon 662 and the initialization of the intermediate display mode of the outer shell icon 661 may be performed at the same time or at different timings. For example, the intermediate display mode of the inner core icon 662 and the intermediate display mode of the outer shell icon 661 may be initialized each time the variable display is performed, or the intermediate display mode may be reset after two or more variable displays. and initialized by a predetermined initialization trigger.

Although the pending icon change pattern has been described for the pending icon 660, the same can be applied to the pending digestion icon 655 as well. The intermediate display mode of the pending icon 660 may be initialized or retained when transitioning to the pending digestion icon 655 .

Thus, the gaming machine 10 can produce a greater sense of expectation for the outcome of the game even if there is a display mode of the pending display lacking in expectation. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can secure execution opportunities for holding effects at various timings.

Here, a modified example of the dual structure display mode of the pending icon 660 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of a dual structure display mode of the pending icon according to the modification of the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 75(1) shows Modified Example 1 of the pending icon 660 . Hold icon 66 of modification 1
4 has a shell icon 661 similar to pending icon 660, but pending icon 660
The difference is that it has an inner core icon 665 with a different size compared to the inner core icon 662 of . The pending icon 664 can change the size of the inner core icon 665 in relation to the degree of expectation for notification and the possibility of notification. The game machine 10 can thereby perform various suspension notice effects.

FIG. 75(2) shows Modified Example 2 of the pending icon 660 . Hold icon 66 of modification 2
6 has a shell icon 661 similar to pending icon 660, but pending icon 660
The difference is that the inner core icon 667 has a different shape compared to the inner core icon 662 of . The pending icon 666 can change the shape of the inner core icon 667 in relation to the degree of expectation for notification and the possibility of notification. The gaming machine 10 can thus perform various suspension notice effects.

Although the change in the size and shape of the inner core icon 662 has been described as a modification of the pending icon 660, the size and shape of the outer shell icon 661 may be changed. Also, although a modified example of the pending icon 660 has been described, the same can be applied to the pending digestion icon 655 .

Next, as a modified example of the suspended icon 660 whose initial state is the dual structure, a suspended icon whose initial state is not the dual structure will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of a hold standby display, a hold consumption display, and an inner core icon row according to a modification of the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 76(1) shows a pending display 505 and a pending digestion display 506. FIG. The pending display 505 displays pending icons 669 corresponding to the number of pending. The pending consumption display 506 displays the pending consumption icon 668 during the floating display. The pending digestion icon 668 and the pending icon 669 have only the outer shell icon and do not have the core icon as the initial state. The pending digestion icon 668 and the pending icon 669 are displayed in the same shape and size, but may be displayed in different display modes so as to be distinguishable. Pending consumption icon 668 and pending icon 66
9 are evenly spaced and aligned in a line. The pending digestion icon 668 and the pending digestion icon 669 are made distinguishable by the pending digestion icon 668 having a pedestal representation (an oval representation indicated by a dashed line in the figure).

FIG. 76(2) shows the inner core icon row. The inner core icon row does not indicate the execution right of the starting memory, but overlaps with the pending display 505 or the pending digestion display 506, so that the pending display 50
5 or the degree of expectation corresponding to the pending consumption indication 506. The inner core icon row consists of eight inner core icons 670a, 670b, 670c, 670d, 670e, 670a, 670b, 670c, 670d, 670e,
670f, 670g, and 670h line up. Note that the number of inner core icons is not limited to eight, and may be five corresponding to the pending digestion icon 668 and the pending icon 669, may be infinitely arranged, or may be one. good. The inner core icon row is aligned corresponding to the alignment interval of the pending digestion icon 668 and the pending icon 669 . The degree of expectation set for each inner core icon constituting the inner core icon row is determined each time a suspension effect is performed, and the number of inner core icon display modes pt01, pt02, pt03, pt04, pt05, pt06 is determined according to the expectation to be performed. and combinations are different. For example, inner core icons 670a, 670c, 670d, 670e,
670f and 670h are in the core icon display mode pt01, the core icon 670b is in the core icon display mode pt02, and the core icon 670g is in the core icon display mode pt03.

FIG. 76(3) shows another example of the core icon string. For example, the core icon 670a has the core icon display mode pt01, the core icons 670b and 670f have the core icon display mode pt02, and the core icons 670c and 670g have the core icon display mode p
t03, the core icons 670d and 670h are in the core icon display mode pt04, and the core icon 670e is in the core icon display mode pt05. In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can produce various expectations by changing the display mode of the core icons forming the core icon row.

Next, FIG. 77 shows pending changes in the pending consumption icon 668 and the pending icon 669.
will be used to explain. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of pending changes in the pending consumption icon and the pending icon of the modified example of the fifth embodiment.

The pending consumption icon 668 and the pending icon 669 change pending by scrolling the inner core icon row on the back side of the pending digestion icon 668 and the pending icon 669 and then stopping (suspension icon roulette effect).

The pending icon roulette (holding icon roulette effect) shown in FIG. 77(1) displays one pending digestion icon 668 and four pending icons 669, and shows how the inner core icon row scrolls left behind them. In FIG. 77(1), the core icon 670b overlaps the pending digestion icon 668, indicating that the display mode corresponds to the level of expectation (low level of expectation) set in the core icon display mode pt02. Also, the first hold icon 66
The inner core icon 670c is superimposed on 9, indicating that the display mode corresponds to the degree of expectation (standard) set in the inner core icon display mode pt01. In addition, the core icon 670d overlaps the second pending icon 669, indicating that the display mode corresponds to the degree of expectation (standard) set in the core icon display mode pt01. In addition, the core icon 670e overlaps the third pending icon 669, indicating that the display mode corresponds to the degree of expectation (standard) set in the core icon display mode pt01. In addition, the core icon 670f overlaps the fourth pending icon 669, indicating that the display mode corresponds to the degree of expectation (standard) set in the core icon display mode pt01.

The pending icon roulette shown in FIG. 77(2) displays one pending digestion icon 668 and four pending icons 669, and shows how the inner core icon row scrolls left behind them. 8 inner core icons 670a, 670b, 670c, 670d, 670e, 670f
, 670 g and 670 h are offset from the pending digestion icon 668 and the pending icon 669 . The gaming machine 10 displays eight core icons 670a, 670b, and 670a, 670b, and 670a, 670b, and 670b for the pending consumption icon 668 and the pending icon 669 while shifting the display position of the core icon row.
Which of 70c, 670d, 670e, 670f, 670g, and 670h corresponds is produced. The inner core icon row includes eight inner core icons 670a, 670b, 670c,
670d, 670e, 670f, 670g, and 670h are arranged in a loop, and the inner core icon that has reached the outside of the display area from the left end appears in the display area from the right end.

In the pending icon roulette shown in FIG. 77(3), eight inner core icons 670a, 670b, 670c, 670d,
670e, 670f, 670g, and 670h are determined to correspond. By determining the core icons corresponding to the pending digestion icon 668 and the pending icon 669, only the core icons that have correspondence are displayed, and the core icons that have no correspondence are hidden.

This causes the pending digestion icon 668 and the first through third pending icons 6
69 indicates that the display mode corresponds to the degree of expectation (standard) set in the inner core icon display mode pt01. Further, the fourth pending icon 669 provides guidance that the display mode corresponds to the level of expectation (medium level of expectation) set in the core icon display mode pt03.

Next, the display mode of the pending icon after the pending icon roulette effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the pending icon after the pending icon roulette effect according to the modification of the fifth embodiment.

The pending icons (including the pending icon 669 and the pending consumption icon 668) shown in FIG. 78(1) are similar to the pending icon 669 and the pending consumption icon 668 shown in FIG. 77(3).
Display the inner core icon superimposed on the outer shell icon. In this way, the gaming machine 10 makes the display mode of the pending icon 669 and the pending digestion icon 668 distinguishable before and after the pending icon roulette effect.

The pending icons (including the pending icon 669 and the pending digestion icon 668) shown in FIG. 78(2) are added to the core icon from the display state of the pending icon 669 and the pending digestion icon 668 shown in FIG. 77(3). Add color to the outer shell icon and hide the inner core icon. In this way, the gaming machine 10 makes the display mode of the pending icon 669 and the pending digestion icon 668 distinguishable before and after the pending icon roulette effect.

Next, as a modified example of the fifth embodiment, display effects on the holding base will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. FIG. FIG. 79 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a holding pedestal display of a modified example of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 80 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a holding pedestal display of a modified example of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 81 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of a holding pedestal display of a modified example of the fifth embodiment. The suspension effects in the suspension icons (including the suspension icon 669 and the suspension digestion icon 668) are all effects of the suspension. Not doing so is conventionally common. The gaming machine 10 of the modified example of the fifth embodiment makes it possible to produce a sense of expectation sustainability by having the result of the predetermined holding effect related to the holding effect of the next time onward.

The holding pedestal 670 shown in FIG. 79(1) includes four holding accumulation displays 671 and an activation trigger display 672 consisting of round windows. The four pending accumulation displays 671 store and display the display modes of pending consumption icons 668 that have been consumed during a predetermined period. For example, the pending accumulation display 671 displays the new history on the left side and the old history on the right side in chronological order. In addition, pending cumulative display 6
71 is not limited to chronological order, and may be rearranged and displayed in a predetermined order such as order of degree of expectation. For example, the first pending cumulative display 671 from the left displays the degree of expectation (for example, green) corresponding to the pending digestion icon 673 on the pending pedestal 670, and the second and third pending cumulative displays 671 are The degree of expectation (for example, green and blue) corresponding to the past pending digestion icon 668 is displayed, and the fourth pending accumulated display 671 is blank because there is no display target. The actuation trigger display 672 indicates that there is no actuation trigger for the display effect on the pending pedestal (suspended pedestal effect). Activation trigger indication 672 may be, for example, the message indication "POWER
ON" is displayed in a non-inverted state.

The pending pedestal 670 shown in FIG. 79(2) stores and displays the display mode of the new pending digestion icon 673 in the first pending cumulative display 671 from the left.
Right shift the memory display at . The holding pedestal 670 uses the fact that all the four holding accumulation displays 671 are filled as the activation trigger of the holding pedestal effect on the holding pedestal. The gaming machine 10 obtains the activation trigger of the pending pedestal effect and executes the pending pedestal effect. For example, the game machine 10 highlights the display mode of the activation trigger display 672 (reverses the message display "POWER ON") to guide the acquisition of the activation trigger, and displays the pending digestion icon on the pending pedestal 670. 6
73 is displayed as an effect.

The holding pedestal 670 shown in FIG. 79(3) changes the display mode of the holding digestion icon 673 on the holding pedestal 670, for example, from green before change to yellow with a higher degree of expectation based on four holding accumulation displays 671. to update. The holding pedestal 670 also includes four holding cumulative displays 67
1 is reset to blank display.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 displays the history of the display mode of the pending consumption icon 668 on the pending base 670, and changes the display mode of the pending consumption icon 668 based on the history display. As a result, the game machine 10 makes it possible to produce the continuity of expectations by relating the result of the predetermined holding performance to the holding performance of the next time and thereafter.

Although the game machine 10 obtains an operation trigger and changes the display mode of the pending digestion icon 673 on the pending pedestal 670, the operating state is maintained for a predetermined period and the pending digestion icon 673 on the pending pedestal 670 is changed. Another pending digestion icon 668 that is pending digestion behind icon 673
You may make it change the display mode of .

In addition, the pending accumulation display 671 stores and displays different display modes of the pending consumption icon 668, but the pending consumption icon 673 on the holding base 670 is set as the pending icon 669, and the pending consumption icon 673 may be displayed.

A holding pedestal 680 shown in FIG. 80(1) is a holding pedestal in the shape of a gas stove. Holding pedestal 68
0 includes four pending accumulation indications 681 and an active trigger indication 682 consisting of flame shapes. The four pending accumulation displays 681 memorize and display the display mode of the pending consumption icon 668 consumed during a predetermined period. The four flame-shaped pending cumulative displays 681 are displayed according to the degree of expectation of the pending digestion icon 668 that has been digested in a predetermined period.
It may become a big flame. The holding pedestal 680 stores and displays the degree of expectation of the holding digestion icon 668 digested during the predetermined period in the same display mode, but is different in that the display mode is converted and stored and displayed. do. For example, the first hold accumulation display 681 from the left displays the degree of expectation (for example, a small red flame) corresponding to the hold digestion icon 683 on the hold base 680, and the second and third hold accumulation displays 681 displays the degree of expectation (for example, a small red flame and a yellow flame) corresponding to the past pending digestion icon 668, and the fourth pending cumulative display 681 has no display target and displays blank. The actuation trigger display 682 indicates that there is no actuation trigger for the display effect on the pending pedestal (suspended pedestal effect). Activation trigger display 682, for example, non-reverse displays the message display "TURN ON".

The pending pedestal 680 shown in FIG. 80(2) stores and displays the display mode of the new pending digestion icon 683 in the first pending cumulative display 681 from the left.
Right shift the memory display at . The holding pedestal 680 uses the fact that all the four holding accumulation displays 681 are filled as the activation trigger of the holding pedestal effect on the holding pedestal. The gaming machine 10 obtains the activation trigger of the pending pedestal effect and executes the pending pedestal effect. For example, the gaming machine 10 displays the display mode of the operation trigger display 682 in reverse display (displays the message display “TURN ON” in reverse).
, indicating that the activation trigger has been obtained, and the pending digestion icon 68 on the pending pedestal 680
3 is displayed as an effect. For example, the appearance of the top surface of the holding pedestal 680 is changed to show the heat generated by the flame acting on the holding fire icon 683 .

The holding pedestal 680 shown in FIG. 80(3) changes the display mode of the holding digestion icon 683 on the holding pedestal 680, for example, from green before change to yellow with higher expectations based on four holding cumulative displays 681. to update. The hold pedestal 680 also includes four hold accumulation displays 68
1 is reset to blank display.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 displays a history of the display mode of the pending consumption icon 683 on the pending base 680, and changes the display mode of the pending consumption icon 683 based on the history display. As a result, the game machine 10 makes it possible to produce the continuity of expectations by relating the result of the predetermined holding performance to the holding performance of the next time and thereafter. In addition, the gaming machine 10 converts the display mode and stores and displays the degree of expectation of the reservation consumption icon 683 consumed by the reservation base 680 in a predetermined period, so that it can correspond to various production forms.

A holding pedestal 680 shown in FIG. 81(1) displays a holding digestion icon 684 on a gas stove-shaped holding pedestal in the shape of a raw egg. For example, the game machine 10 displays the pending icon 669 in an egg shape, and extracts the contents from the shell during pending digestion to make a pending digestion icon 684 on a gas stove-shaped holding pedestal. That is, the gaming machine 10 can change the display mode of the pending icon 669 to the pending digestion icon 684 in accordance with the pending pedestal 680 . Such a gaming machine 10 can suitably produce a scene in which the flame of the gas stove acts on the pending extinguishing icon 684 .

Also, by changing the shape of the pending digestion icon 684 from the shape of a raw egg to the shape of a fried egg, the game machine 10
can suitably guide the amount of action that the pending accumulation display 681 acts on the pending digestion icon 684 . At this time, the gaming machine 10 can make the degree of expectation indicated by the pending digestion icon 684 correspond to the doneness and browning of the fried egg.

A holding pedestal 680 shown in FIG. 81(2) carries a pending digestion icon 685 that is smaller than the pending digestion icon 684 carried by the holding pedestal 680 shown in FIG. 81(1). Such a size of the pending digestion icon 685 produces ease of cooking, and changes from a raw egg shape to a fried egg shape with a smaller amount of heat than the pending digestion icon 684 on which the retention pedestal 680 is placed. That is, the gaming machine 10 can perform an expectation performance in combination with not only the display mode of the pending cumulative display 681 on the pending pedestal 680 but also the pending digestion icon 685 .

The gaming machine 10 (including modifications) of the fifth embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 stores a starting memory as the execution right of a game (for example, a special figure 1 game, a special figure 2 game), and suspends display of the starting memory in relation to the result of the game corresponding to the starting memory. It is possible to change the aspect and execute the pending notice effect, and the display means (for example, the display device 41
), and control means (for example, game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display the starting memory. The control means provides a pending display including a first display element (for example, inner core icon 662) indicating the degree of expectation for the outcome of the game and a second display element (outer shell icon 661) indicating the possibility of change of the first display element. 69, 70, 72 and 73 to display the starting memory on the display means.

Note that the processing functions described above can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program describing the processing contents of the functions that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the above processing functions are realized on the computer. A program describing the processing content can be recorded in a computer-readable recording medium. Computer-readable recording media include magnetic storage devices,
There are optical discs, magneto-optical recording media, semiconductor memories, and the like. Magnetic storage devices include hard disk devices (HDD), flexible disks (FD), magnetic tapes, and the like. Optical disks include DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), DVD-RAM, CD (Compact Disk)-RO
M/RW (ReWritable) and the like. MO (Magneto-Optical disk) is used as a magneto-optical recording medium.
etc.

When distributing the program, for example, DVD, C
Portable recording media such as D-ROM are sold. It is also possible to store the program in the storage device of the server computer and transfer the program from the server computer to another computer via the network.

A computer that executes a program stores, for example, a program recorded on a portable recording medium or a program transferred from a server computer in its own storage device. The computer then reads the program from its own storage device and executes processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute processing according to the program. Also, the computer can execute processing according to the received program every time the program is transferred from a server computer connected via a network.

In addition, at least part of the above processing functions are DSP (Digital Signal Processor), A
SIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), PLD (Programmable Logic De
vice) or other electronic circuits.

It should be noted that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine. It can be applied to all game machines using game balls and slot machines which are game machines using medals.

Also, the disclosed embodiments should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. Also, the configurations of the above-described embodiment and modifications may be combined and applied. The scope of the invention is indicated by the appended claims rather than by the foregoing description,
All changes within the meaning and range of equivalence to the claims are intended to be included.

10 game machine 41, 830 display device 100, 100a game control device 300 effect control device

Claims (1)

a notice effect means capable of executing a notice effect for predicting the outcome of the game;
ready-to- reach effect means capable of executing a ready-to- reach effect for directing a process of deriving the result of the game after execution of the advance notice effect;
including
The notice effect means includes a first fixed notice effect that gives a fixed notice in a first mode that the result of the game is a special result, and the first mode that provides an overlap period with the first fixed notice effect . A second fixed notice effect that gives a fixed notice that the result of the game is a special result in a different second mode, and a non-fixed notice effect that gives a notice that the result of the game is a special result with a predetermined degree of reliability. is executable and
The ready-to- reach effect means executes a first ready-to-reach effect that directs the derivation process in a first period, and a second ready -to- reach effect that directs the derivation process in a second period different from the first period. It is possible, and when the notice effect means executes the non-fixed notice effect, the ratio of selecting the second ready -to- win effect is made larger than the ratio of selecting the first ready-to-win effect,
game machine.

Images